Professional Documents
Culture Documents
7813151823252838 GHz
shorthaul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links
9400AWY Rel.2.1
SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
User Manual
3DB 16142 EAAA
Ed.02
Navigation principles
This manual is delivered to Customers in electronic format only (file Adobe Acrobat pdf) inside the specific
9400AWY Customer Documentation CDROM: for a comfortable navigation, two hyperlink types are
present:
those inside the text window, marked by a blue rectangle around any crossreference to a figure,
table, part, section, chapter, paragraph, numbered list, and page: by clicking such a blue rectangle,
you are led to the referenced component
the bookmarks, present on the left side of the text window. Most of them represent the online
handbook table of contents. Bookmarks can be expanded (clicking on [+] ) or reduced (clicking on
[] ). By clicking on one bookmark, you are led to the referenced part.
WARNING:
the bookmark window is not visible if you use Acrobat reader in fullscreen modality.
For further information, refer to Acrobat reader help online.
If printed on paper by Users, it is suggested to divide this manual by numbered separators, for an easier
access to the information herein contained:
CONTENTS
SEPARATOR
QUICK GUIDE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
1
2
3
4
5
The standard Customer Documentation for 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP version V2.1.1 is in the English
language and is distributed to Customers only by the following CDROM:
CDROM TITLE
DCP 9400AWY 2.1 V2.1.1 CDROM
Technical Code
3DB 16142 ACAA
It contains, in electronic format (ADOBE ACROBAT pdf files), the following main documents:
Document Title
Document
Technical Code
Notes
this manual
For further information and additional documents, please refer to Appendix G Documentation
guide on page 567
2 / 592
QUICK GUIDE
9400AWY Rel.2.1 V2.1.1 USER MANUAL
Tab. 1. below allows to access immediately the most frequently needed operative pieces of information
contained in this manual and in other related handbooks.
To find any other kind of information not listed in this table, please refer to the TABLE OF CONTENTS of
this handbook, or, if you are using the pdf file of it, use the Acrobat Reader Find function.
Tab. 1. Quick guide
If you need immediate operative information on following matters:
have a short description of the
system
read pages 37 to 53
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
3 / 592
a)
4 / 592
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
MAINTENANCE
d)
TCO SUITE
login
logoff
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
5 / 592
f)
g)
6 / 592
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
SYSTEM UPGRADE
i)
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
7 / 592
8 / 592
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
TABLE OF CONTENTS
QUICK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
29
31
31
32
33
34
35
36
12 SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 Equipment architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.1 Splitmount architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.2 IDU (Indoor Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.3 ODU (Outdoor Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.4 IDUODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.1 1+0 Unprotected configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.2 1+1 Protected Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4 Equipment Craft Terminal and TCO Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.1 ECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.2 RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.3 TCO Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5 Flash Card types and content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6 General on equipment installation and SWP installation and management . . . . . .
12.6.1 Main phases for 9400AWY HW and SW installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.2 First SWP installation in PC and NE environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.3 How to check ECT and NE versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.4 Common situations requiring ECT and/or NE upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.5 Flash Card related special procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.6 Craft Terminal related special procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.7 NE configuration data change and save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.8 NE data save after commissioning completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.9 NE data compatibility between SWP 2.1.x versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
37
39
39
42
46
49
50
50
51
54
54
54
55
56
58
59
60
62
64
64
64
65
65
65
67
68
69
70
73
74
75
75
76
77
78
79
80
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
9 / 592
84
85
88
89
90
93
93
94
96
97
98
99
100
101
101
101
104
105
108
113
114
116
117
117
119
119
122
122
123
15 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1 General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1.1 Reference system standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1.2 RF channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1.3 Transmitted power at antenna port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1.4 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1.5 ETSI System Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1.6 Protection switching system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2 Tributary interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.3 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.4 Maximum capacity and Modulation type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.5 IDUODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.6 Manmachine interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.7 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.8 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.9 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.10 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.10.1 Operating environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility/safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.10.3 Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.11 Dismantling & Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
128
129
129
130
131
132
134
135
135
135
135
136
136
136
136
137
137
137
137
138
139
10 / 592
21.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.1.2 Software product list and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.2 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1 specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.2.1 PC characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.2.2 NE MIB Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.2.3 SWP version specific data and Reference Information Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
141
142
142
142
142
143
144
146
146
147
148
149
151
154
155
156
156
159
160
161
164
165
166
166
167
168
170
170
171
172
172
173
180
180
181
181
182
183
183
184
184
185
186
186
187
187
23 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.1 NE Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.2 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.2.1 Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.2.2 NTP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.2.3 Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.2.4 IP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
189
190
191
192
193
195
196
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
11 / 592
204
205
207
210
210
212
213
213
214
214
216
217
218
24 EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.1 IDU level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.1.1 1+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.1.2 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.1.3 Board level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.2 ODU level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3.1 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3.3 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
219
221
221
222
222
223
224
224
225
225
25 LINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.1 Tab panels in the Resource Detail Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.1.1 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25.1.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
228
228
228
26 RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.1 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.2.1 Local or Remote Transmitter Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.2.2 ODU service kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.2.3 Alarm Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.3 Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.4 RTPC & ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.4.1 ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.4.2 RTPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.5 Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.5.1 How to read a Power Measurement file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.6 BER measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
233
234
234
234
234
234
235
238
239
240
241
244
246
12 / 592
251
251
251
252
252
253
254
255
255
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
257
258
258
259
260
260
261
262
262
263
264
210 LOOPBACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210.1 Hardware implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210.1.1 IDU loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210.1.2 ODU loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210.2 Available Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210.3 Loopback domain views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210.4 How to activate a loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210.5 How to remove a loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
267
267
267
268
269
272
275
276
211 DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211.1 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211.1.1 Counter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211.1.2 Alarm Sublist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211.2 Log Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211.2.1 Alarm and Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211.2.2 Software Trace Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211.3 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211.3.2 Remote Inventory display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211.4 Abnormal Condition List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211.5 Summary Block Diagram View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211.6 Current Configuration view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
277
278
278
278
279
280
281
282
282
283
284
285
288
289
289
290
292
292
293
294
294
295
295
296
296
213 SW
213.1
213.2
213.3
297
297
298
299
DOWNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server Access Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Init SW Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SW Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
13 / 592
301
301
302
302
302
304
306
307
309
309
309
310
310
311
312
329
329
329
329
330
330
331
332
333
334
14 / 592
314
314
315
317
318
318
320
320
321
326
326
326
327
335
336
337
338
338
339
339
340
340
341
343
344
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
32.3.9 TCO Suite SetUp Tool: online recover, modification and application of a
provisioning file (not interactive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.3.10 Quick Configuration Procedure steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.3.11 Powering UP the IDU(s) with the ODU(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.4 Commissioning of STATION B phase 1 (Turn up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.5 End of commissioning phase 1 (Turn up) in STATION A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.5.1 Remote NE (station B) acquisition on craft terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.5.2 Testing configurations for hop quality check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.6 Commissioning station A phase 2 (acceptance test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.6.1 System Installation and cabling visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.6.2 Local configuration control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.6.3 Channel 1 functionality tests (1+0 and 1+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.6.4 Channel 0 functionality tests (1+1 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.6.5 Hop stability test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.6.6 NE integration tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.7 Commissioning station B Phase 2 (Acceptance Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.8 Final operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.9 Annex A: fine antenna alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.10 Annex B: light service kit cable operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
345
346
369
373
374
374
376
377
377
377
382
394
396
397
403
403
404
405
407
409
409
410
410
410
415
415
415
415
416
418
418
418
418
419
419
421
421
421
421
421
421
423
423
423
15 / 592
430
430
430
430
431
431
432
433
434
434
434
435
436
436
437
441
441
441
441
441
441
442
442
446
446
446
447
447
447
447
448
449
450
451
452
456
460
463
463
463
465
465
466
466
467
469
469
469
470
476
476
477
479
479
16 / 592
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
45.2 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.2.1 EMC norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.2.2 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.2.3 Cautions to avoid equipment damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.3 Routine (preventive) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.3.1 Routine (preventive) Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.4 Consequences of unit extraction in the IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.5 Corrective Maintenance general flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.6 Alarm acknowledgment and attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.6.1 Alarm acknowledgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.6.2 Alarm Attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.7 Troubleshooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.8 Troubleshooting via Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.8.1 Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.8.2 Alarm surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.8.3 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.8.4 Operators Controls of the protection switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.8.5 Tx mute function (local and remote) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.8.6 Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.8.7 BER measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.8.8 Commissioning tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.9 Hints on the troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.9.1 Problems with the Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.9.2 Analog measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.9.3 NMS 64 kbit/s V.11 and G.703 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.9.4 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.9.5 Empty USM icon in NES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.9.6 Remote NE unreachable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.9.7 Configuration change from 4 QAM to 16 QAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.9.8 Quick configuration menu correct use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.9.9 Abnormal condition list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.9.10 Tx Mute functionality for interferences investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.9.11 Tributaries 17 to 32 visible in 16E1+Ethernet configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.10 IDU unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.10.1 IDU MAIN unit replacement procedure (CH1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.10.2 IDU EXTENSION unit replacement procedure (CH0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.11 ODU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.12 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.12.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.12.2 Repair Form filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.3.2
47.3.3
47.3.4
47.3.5
480
481
482
483
485
485
485
485
485
486
486
487
492
494
494
SECTION 5: APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51 APPENDIX A: SAFETYEMCEMFESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . .
51.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.2 Compliance with International Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.3 Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.3.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.3.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.3.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.3.4 Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.3.5 Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.3.6 Equipment connection to earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.3.7 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.3.8 Microwave radiations (EMF norms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.3.9 Specific safety rules in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.4.1 EMC General Norms Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.4.2 EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.4.3 EMC General Norms Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.6 Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.7 Labels affixed to the 9400AWY equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
499
501
501
501
502
502
503
504
505
505
506
506
507
508
509
509
509
509
510
510
510
17 / 592
547
547
547
547
547
548
548
549
553
553
554
555
556
556
558
559
560
561
561
561
562
563
563
564
565
567
567
567
568
569
569
571
571
572
572
573
575
575
575
585
18 / 592
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
FIGURES
Fig. 1. Antistatic protection device kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 2. 9400AWY radio link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 3. 9400AWY R.2.1 splitmount system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 4. Possible configurations of ODU (1+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 5. E1 Protection box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 6. Services Protection box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 7. 9400AWY R.2.1 (1+0) IDU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 8. 9400AWY R.2.1 (1+1) IDU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 9. ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 10. 9400AWY (1+0) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 11. 9400AWY (1+1 HSB SD) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 12. 9400AWY (1+1 HSB one antenna) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 13. 9400AWY (1+1 FD Double Antenna AP) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 14. 9400AWY (1+1 FD one antenna AP) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 15. Flash Card content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 16. Main phases for 9400AWY HW and SW installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 17. Software management main phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 18. How to check ECT version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 19. How to check NE SW version (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 20. Label affixed on the IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 21. IDU Main Unit front and rear views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 22. LEDs on the IDU Main Unit front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 23. IDU Extension Unit front and rear views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 24. LEDs on the IDU Extension Unit front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 25. E1 Protection box: views of Equipment Side and Line Side connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 26. Services Protection box: views of Equipment Side and Line Side connectors . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 27. Equipment outputs (summarizing and housekeeping) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 28. Equipment inputs relay scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 29. Equipment inputs open collector scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 30. User service channel: V11 codirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 31. User service channel: V11 contradirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 32. User service channel: G.703 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 33. User service channel: V24/V28 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 34. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 35. Flash Card identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 36. ODU types, identification, dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 37. Label affixed on the ODU and ODUs TRANSCEIVER box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 38. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSBSD or FDDA AP with two antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 39. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSB with one antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 40. Station layout of ODU (1+1) FDAP with one double polar external antenna . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 41. View of ODU with full integrated antenna (V polarization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 42. View of ODU with full integrated antenna (H polarization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 43. Coupler (1338 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 44. Coupler (78 GHz) example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 45. Nose adapters for ODU with separated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 46. Views of ODUs with embedded diplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 47. Views of ODUs with external diplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 48. ODU LEMO connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 49. Composition of ODUs with external diplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 50. ODUs TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
36
37
40
41
43
43
44
45
47
50
52
52
53
53
56
59
60
62
63
69
70
73
77
78
79
84
86
87
87
91
91
92
92
94
95
98
99
101
102
103
114
115
116
117
117
120
121
122
123
124
19 / 592
20 / 592
125
126
148
148
149
149
151
152
154
154
155
156
157
157
159
160
161
164
165
165
166
166
167
168
168
170
174
175
175
176
176
177
177
179
179
180
181
183
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
206
207
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
207
208
209
210
211
211
212
213
216
216
217
217
218
220
220
221
222
222
223
224
225
225
227
228
230
231
231
232
233
234
235
235
236
237
238
241
242
243
244
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
252
253
254
255
255
256
257
21 / 592
22 / 592
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
264
265
267
267
268
268
268
269
270
271
272
273
273
274
275
276
278
279
279
280
280
281
281
283
284
286
286
287
287
288
289
290
291
292
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
301
302
302
303
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
Fig. 214. Correspondence between MIB saved folder and MIB saved name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 215. Launch of MIB load from disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 216. MIB load from disk phase 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 217. MIB load from disk phase 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 218. Common components of different SWPs (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 219. CDROM TCO Suite Main Menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 220. CDROM TCO Suite Advanced Settings screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 221. SWP component selection screen and installation start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 222. SWP component installation end, and installation report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 223. Check of installed Alcatel SWP components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 224. Local Copy of TCO Suite location choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 225. Local Copy of TCO Suite progress and end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 226. Copy cancelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 227. Shortcut to the TCO Suite Start icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 228. Selecting SWP Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 229. SWP Administrator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 230. Directory selection for the descriptor file .DSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 231. SWP available for download to NEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 232. Relative positions of stations A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 233. Equipment interconnections for configurations with 16E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 234. Equipment interconnections for configurations with 16E1 + Audio and User Service
Channel plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 235. Equipment interconnections for configurations with 16E1 + Enhanced Ethernet plugin
Fig. 236. Equipment interconnections for configurations with 16E1 + Enhanced Ethernet
plugin + Audio and User Service Channel plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 237. Equipment interconnections for configurations with 32E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 238. Equipment interconnections for configurations with 32E1 + Audio and User Service
Channel plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 239. PreProvisioning Tool splash screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 240. PreProvisioning Tool console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 241. PreProvisioning Tool start screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 242. SetUp Tool splash screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 243. SetUp Tool console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 244. SetUp Tool start screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 245. Quick Configuration Procedure: main NE parameter configuration (Step A) . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 246. Quick Configuration Procedure Step B: PDH Tributary configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 247. Quick Configuration Procedure Step B: Ethernet GPort configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 248. Quick Configuration Procedure Step B: Ethernet GPort QoS configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 249. Quick Configuration Procedure: Channels Configuration (Step C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 250. Frequency Data Help: choice of ODU type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 251. Frequency Data Help: frequency data of chosen ODU type (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 252. Example of Frequency Data manual setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 253. RTPC setting with ATPC disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 254. Setting of enabled ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 255. ATPC and RTPC Configuration for both channels (1+1 HSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 256. Quick Configuration Procedure: Link Identifier configuration (Step D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 257. Quick Configuration Procedure: Automatic restoration criteria configuration (Step E) . .
Fig. 258. Quick Configuration Procedure: OSPF Area Configuration (Step F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 259. Quick Configuration Procedure: Local IP address, Ethernet and NTP configuration
(Step G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 260. Quick Configuration Procedure: Configuration of TMNRF, TMNV11 and TMNG703
channels (Step H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 261. Quick Configuration Procedure: Configuration of TMN inframe (Step H) . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 262. Quick Configuration Procedure: IP Static Routes Configuration (Step I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 263. Quick Configuration Procedure: Default Gateway Routing configuration (Step I) . . . . . .
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
303
304
305
306
313
315
316
316
317
317
318
319
319
320
321
321
323
325
329
332
333
334
335
336
337
344
344
344
345
345
346
347
349
351
352
353
355
355
356
356
357
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
23 / 592
24 / 592
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
374
375
375
376
376
383
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
393
394
396
397
398
398
399
400
405
416
417
421
422
424
424
425
426
426
427
433
435
437
439
444
448
449
450
452
456
464
470
471
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
Fig. 264. Quick Configuration Procedure: EOW and Auxiliary Interface configuration (Step J) . . .
Fig. 265. Quick Configuration Procedure: External Input and Output Points configuration (Step K)
Fig. 266. Quick Configuration Procedure: Summary (Step L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 267. ODU(s) alarm status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 268. Transmit power check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 269. Received power check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 270. Received power details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 271. NES window local NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 272. Create NE in the CT map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 273. NMS Radio side Remote NE acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 274. Test bench for tributary quality test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 275. Test bench for User service channel quality test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 276. 1+0 Summary block diagram view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 277. 1+1 Summary block diagram view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 278. Channel 0 lockout mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 279. Near End loopbacks points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 280. Loopback control in the CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 281. Far End loopback point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 282. Test bench for tributary functionality check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 283. Tributary alarm status monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 284. Test bench for User Service Channel functionality check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 285. Test bench for Optional Ethernet Data Channel functionality (with 4xGigabit
Ethernet plugin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 286. Engineering order wire organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 287. Channel 1 forced mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 288. Test bench for hop stability test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 289. Test bench for NMS Line side acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 290. NES window local NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 291. Create NMS Line side NE in the CT map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 292. NMS Line side NE monitoring in the CT map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 293. Test bench for EOW line side functionality test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 294. Light service kit cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 295. Special extractor to remove the coaxial cables 1.0/2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 296. Lever for ODU mounting/dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 297. LEDs and pushbutton on IDU Extension unit for maintenance purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 298. LEDs and pushbutton on IDU MAIN unit for maintenance purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 299. Checks on Radio domain : Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 300. Checks on Radio domain : Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 301. Checks on Radio domain : Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 302. Checks on Radio domain : RTPC & ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 303. Checks on Radio domain : nonintrusive BER measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 304. Checks on Radio domain : Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 305. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 306. Troubleshooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 307. Alarm and status synthesis indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 308. Active alarm screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 309. Lower Layers Manager screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 310. Abnormal condition list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 311. Tx Mute functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 312. Tributaries 17 to 32 visible in 16E1+ Ethernet configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 313. Details for IDU MAIN unit or FLASH CARD replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 314. Details for IDU EXTENSION unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 315. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 316. Dismounting the fixing brackets and cover unfix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 317. Release and sliding out the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
472
472
473
474
487
488
489
490
492
492
494
511
512
512
513
513
514
514
515
515
516
517
518
519
519
520
521
523
524
524
525
526
526
527
528
528
529
530
531
531
532
533
534
535
538
539
540
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
553
25 / 592
555
555
558
562
574
TABLES
Tab. 1. Quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 2. Main additional features with respect to SWP version V2.1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 3. Tributaries and modulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 4. 13 to 38 GHz 4/16 QAM configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 5. Bit rate of the IDUODU signal on the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 6. IDU shelf provisioning for 1+0 and 1+1 configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 7. IDU Main Unit: external interfaces list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 8. Power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 9. ECT connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 10. OS (or ECT) connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 11. RJ45 connectors leds for Ethernet user data interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 12. IDU Extension Unit: external interfaces list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 13. Equipment Side and Line Side connectors of E1 Protection box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 14. E1 tributaries (1 to 8) connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 15. E1 tributaries (9 to 16) connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 16. E1 tributaries (17 to 24) connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 17. E1 tributaries (25 to 32) connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 18. Equipment Side and Line Side connectors of Services Protection box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 19. Alarms Housekeeping connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 20. NMSV.11 + Audio 1 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 21. NMSG.703 + Audio 2 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 22. User service channel connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 23. Flash Cards provisioning and associated & Software Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 24. Equipment accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 25. ODU dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 26. ODU configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 27. 7 GHz Transceiver assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 28. Branching assemblies for 7 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 29. 8 GHz Transceiver assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 30. Branching assemblies for 8 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 31. 13 GHz ODU (FIXEDSHIFTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 32. 15 GHz ODU (FIXEDSHIFTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 33. 18 GHz ODU (FIXEDSHIFTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 34. 18 GHz ODU (VARIABLESHIFTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 35. 23 GHz ODU (FIXEDSHIFTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 36. 23 GHz ODU (VARIABLESHIFTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 37. 25 GHz ODU (FIXEDSHIFTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 38. 28 GHz ODU (FIXEDSHIFTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 39. 38 GHz ODU (FIXEDSHIFTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 40. Pole Mounting versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 41. Available couplers (1338 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 42. Available couplers (78 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 43. ODU Output flanges with external antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 44. ODU external interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 45. RF interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 46. 9400 AWY family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 47. ETSI System Characteristics 32E1 (typical values) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 48. ETSI System Characteristics 16E1 (typical values) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 49. ETSI System Characteristics 8E1 (typical values) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 50. ETSI System Characteristics 4E1 (typical values) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
32
38
48
49
68
70
74
75
75
76
77
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
88
89
90
93
96
98
100
106
106
107
107
108
109
110
110
111
111
112
112
112
113
116
117
118
119
119
127
132
132
133
133
26 / 592
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
134
138
141
144
158
239
259
261
263
269
282
282
330
348
350
416
438
439
440
451
469
480
508
551
552
569
570
571
575
575
27 / 592
a)
28 / 592
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
END OF SECTION
USER MANUAL
FRONT MATTER
PAGE
Preliminary information
31
37
67
97
127
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
29 / 592
30 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
Warranty
Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contract of sale of the equipment to
which this handbook refers to.
AlcatelLucent makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims
the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. AlcatelLucent will not
be liable for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential,
incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
b)
Information
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of AlcatelLucent.
c)
Copyright Notification
The technical information of this manual is the property of AlcatelLucent and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
d)
Safety recommendations
The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or
damage to the equipment:
1)
Service Personnel
Installation and service must be carried out by authorized persons having appropriate technical
training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and
service, so as to prevent any personal injury or danger to other persons, as well as prevent
damaging the equipment.
2)
3)
Safety Rules
Recommended safety rules are indicated in para.51.3 on pages 502.
Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this handbook should
be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In case of conflict between safety instructions
stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local norms will prevail.
Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety rules stated in this manual will prevail.
e)
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
31 / 592
This manual describes the 9400AWY Rel.2.1 equipment running with SWP version V2.1.1.
This table sumsup the main additional features (mainly related to new HW items and new SW features
affecting the Graphical User Interface) of SWP version V2.1.1 with respect to previous version V2.1.0:
Tab. 2. Main additional features with respect to SWP version V2.1.0
Replacement of optional Data plugin (with 2 Fast Ethernet ports) with the new optional Enhanced Data
plugin (with 4 Gbit Ethernet ports):
SW management on pages:
210 , from 231 to 232 , from 347 to 351
32 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
FRONT MATTER
FRONT PAGE
QUICK GUIDE
The Quick guide allows to access immediately the most frequently needed operative pieces
of information contained in this manual and in other related handbooks.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
b)
unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the description on the access point
usage (connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Handbook print and assembly instructions This part (after handbook last page 592 ):
is present in the pdf file. Customer can use it to print and assembly the handbook in the same
way that is done by AlcatelLucent factory.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
33 / 592
ED.02 is the first validated and released edition associated to SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1 final Version
V2.1.1 , and fully annuls and replaces previous ED.01 (same P/N), that was issued in association with
prerelease V2.1.1*.
WARNING:
If you have a SWP version different from final V2.1.1, use neither this manual nor
the CDROM containing it, but those specific for such a version (refer to
AlcatelLucent).
For detailed information regarding the applicability and purpose of this manual, please refer to para.57.1
on page 567
WARNING:
Ed.02 of this manual is validated in conjunction with SWP final version V2.1.1 only.
Information relevant to SWP versions different from V2.1.1 , if any, must be
considered preliminary, subject to change and without any obligation on the part
of AlcatelLucent.
Following information can be useful for users owing the previous edition of this manual. Other users can
simply ignore it.
This edition has been made for the following major changes:
elimination of information regarding the oldtype Data plugin (2 Fast Ethernet ports), throughout
the whole manual
updated information regarding the Flash Cards on pages 93 to 95
updated information regarding the Graphical User Interface, throughout the whole manual,
according to final Version V2.1.1
improved description of ECT & NE upgrade from V2.1.0 to V2.1.1 from page 495
appendix Documentation Guide from page 567 updated for new CDROM and handbooks
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
(yymmdd)
(ECO)
02
080125
00000 57267
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
E.Corradini
34 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Please refer to Appendix A on page 501 to obtain details regarding following information:
Safety rules:
TOPIC
General rules
Dangerous Electrical Voltages
Risk of explosion
Other labels:
TOPIC
b)
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
35 / 592
a)
Unit assemblies
Each of the IDU MAIN UNIT and IDU EXTENSION UNIT is assembled inside its own box and must
be considered an unique item from the service and maintenance points of view. Such an assembly
is supplied by AlcatelLucent as it is and must never be disassembled , with the exception of
operations described in para.47.1, that must be carried out exactly as described.
b)
ELASTICIZED BAND
COILED CORD
Fig. 1. Antistatic protection device kit
c)
Screw fixing
In normal operation conditions, all screws (for unit box closing, cable fixing, etc.) must be always
tightened to avoid item detachment and to ensure the equipment EMIEMC performance.
The screw tightening torque must be:
e)
verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications, then switch off
it)
connect suitable cable to IDU Main Units F or OS Ethernet interface and PC side
f)
perform the logoff, exiting from the CT applications (details in para.22.5.3 and 22.5.4 on page
180)
36 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
12 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
This chapter gives the 1st level description of the equipment architecture and system configurations of the
9400AWY Rel.2.1; it includes the following main parts:
Introduction, herebelow
Equipment architecture, on page 39
System configurations, on page 50
Equipment Craft Terminal and TCO Suite, on page 54
Flash Card types and content, on page 56
General on equipment installation and SWP installation and management, on page 58
12.1 Introduction
The 9400AWY is a family of digital Point to Point microwave PDH and Ethernet radio systems covering
the frequency range from 7 GHz to 38 GHz, consisting of an Indoor Unit (IDU) providing the baseband
processing and tributaries interfaces as well as service channel and supervision, and an Outdoor Unit
(ODU).
IDU and ODU are connected with a single standard coaxial cable (max length specified in para.15.5 on
page 135 ) carrying the main traffic, the remote power supply voltage for the ODU and auxiliary information.
As shown in Fig. 2. below, one 9400AWY radio link is composed by two 9400AWY Network Elements
(ULS NE), having the same hardware and software configurations, with the exception of the go and return
channel frequencies (complementary to each other), and the supervision networks NE specific data.
9400AWY
ULS NE A
9400AWY
ULS NE B
ETSI RADIO
ODU
ODU
ETSI PDH
ETHERNET
SERVICE CH.
ETSI PDH
ETHERNET
SERVICE CH.
IDU
SUPERVISION
NETWORK
IDU
With the exception of Chapter 32 LineUp and Commissioning on page 329, this Manual
deals with the description of a single 9400AWY Network Element.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
37 / 592
up to 32 E1
ETSI
Max Ethernet
Tributaries
Radio Modulation
2xE1
4 x GE
4QAM
4xE1
4 x GE
4QAM / 16QAM
8xE1
4 x GE
4QAM / 16QAM
16xE1
4 x GE
4QAM / 16QAM
32xE1
16QAM
Multiplexer/Demultiplexer
The multiplexer function receives main tributaries and generates a PDH frame.
The demultiplexer function receives a PDH frame and generates main tributaries.
38 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
IDUODU cable(s)
IDU and ODU are connected with a single standard coaxial cable carrying the main traffic, the remote
power supply voltage for the ODU and auxiliary information.
IDU
The mechanical structure adopted comply with ETSI/19 standard practice.
IDU units can be also inserted in a standard ETSI rack, or placed on a desk, or mounted on a wall.
ODU
The ODU can be installed on standard poles, wall or pedestal mount, with an appropriate fastening
system, which guarantees the coarse and fine pointing, even when a faulty ODU has to be replaced.
The ODU (one or two depending on the configuration 1+0 or 1+1, each one with a solar shield)
incorporates the complete RF transceiver and can be associated with an integrated or separate
antenna.
The cabinet is a very compact and robust weatherproof (IP 67) container, designed to be compatible
with hot and very sunny climatic zones.
The ODU can be rapidly installed on standard poles with an appropriate fastening system. The pole
mounting is the same for 1+0 or 1+1 configurations from 7 to 38 GHz.
The ODU is fixed by means of quick latches. This system allows to change the ODU without altering
antenna pointing.
N.B.
An IDU+ODU fullindoor configuration (obviously without antenna) is also available; its physical
implementation is described in the Installation Handbook.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
39 / 592
ODU Ch#1
Antenna
ODU
IDUODU cable
NE
ULS
IDU
ODU
IDUODU cables
NE
ULS
DISTRIBUTOR SHELF (optional)
D
IDU
B
A
Legend:
D
SERVICE CHANNELS PROTECTION BOX
C
E1 PROTECTION BOX
B
IDU MAIN UNIT Ch#1
A
IDU EXTENSION UNIT Ch#0
Fig. 3. 9400AWY R.2.1 splitmount system
40 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Antenna CH 0
Antenna CH 1
ODU CH 1
ODU CH 0
to IDU EXTENSION UNIT
COUPLER
ANTENNA
ODU CH 0
ODU CH 1
to IDU EXTENSION UNIT
ODU CH 0
to IDU EXTENSION UNIT
ODU CH 1
to IDU MAIN UNIT
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
41 / 592
The IDU incorporates the baseband processing and offers tributaries interfaces as well as service
channel and supervision.
The IDU is frequencyindependent, but capacitydependent.
As shown in Fig. 3. on page 40, up to 2 active subracks (the Main IDU unit and the Extension IDU unit)
and some additional passive boxes are used as basic elements to build the following configurations:
one Service Channels Protection Box (only if the optional AUDIO + USER SERVICE
CHANNEL plugin is equipped)
both the Main and the Extension IDU units, if not equipped with plugsin, are physically able
to support up to 16xE1 interfaces. Such capacity can be reduced according to the Software
Label employed.
independently from the tributary plugins listed above, another optional plugin, to be plugged
onto the Main IDU unit only, allows the AUDIO + USER SERVICE CHANNEL functionality.
In 1+1 configuration:
the Main and Extension units are interconnected by means of an auxiliary flat cable (100wires
SCSI front panel connector)
the protection of Service Channels signals at line side is achieved by the Service Channels
Protection Box , provided that the AUDIO + USER SERVICE CHANNEL plugin is equipped.
42 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[1]
[2]
[3]
Power supply
One PSU is integrated in each of the Main and Extension units; the main characteristics are:
[4]
[5]
Protection Boxes
The E1 Protection Box and Service Channels Protection Box, used in 1+1 configurations, are
shown in Fig. 5. and Fig. 6. below. They are passive components exploiting the splitting functions
of relevant signals from/to the Main IDU and Extension IDU units and from/to the User lines, as
shown in Fig. 8. on page 45 .
equipment side
equipment side
Such boxes have been designed in order to have the connectors present at User line side exactly
equal to those of the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 IDU Main and Extension units.
In this way, Customers wishing to replace the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 IDU platform with the 9400AWY
Rel.2.1 IDU platform can do it without refurbishing the existing station cabling and DDF wiring.
For details, refer to para.13.5 on page 79 (E1 Protection Box) and to para.13.6 on page 84
(Service Channels Protection Box).
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
43 / 592
Distribution shelves
For the physical connection at station DDF of the User signal cables to the main tributaries
connectors of the IDU Main and Extension units, two main solutions are envisaged:
usage of the Customer Plant Distributor racks, connected to the IDU main tributaries
connectors by means of Customer own cables or cables supplied by AlcatelLucent;
usage of AlcatelLucent distributor subracks, to be housed in the same rack where 9400AWY
IDU shelves are installed.
16xE1 configurations:
16xE1 + AUDIO & USER SERVICE CHANNEL plugin + 4 x 10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet
plugin
32xE1 configurations:
32xE1
All subequipped configurations delivered from factory can be upgraded later by means of the
specific upgrade kits, as described in chapter 47 on page 469.
[8]
Block diagrams
Main board
(JBIDUM)
4 x 10/100/1000 BaseT
1732E1
Main IDU
Ethernetdata
plugin
Ethernet
plugin
E3/DS3plugin
16 E1/DS1plugin
1732E1
plugin
(JAIDUE1)
EPS
MUX/DEMUX
ODU
116E1
NMS_V11
NMS_G703
IDUODU
IDU
ODU
interface
Audio channels
Audiochannels
+ +ServiceChannel
V11 + G703
Plugin
(JAIDUSC)
Plugin
PSU
PSU
uPuP
EC
/ RC
Alarms& housekeepings
RS232
10/100 BaseT
ECT
N.B.
OS (or ECT)
44 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[6]
N.B.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
45 / 592
(64Kbit/s)
Service Channels
SERVICE CHANNELS
PROTECTION BOX
116E1
116E1
Audio channels
116E1
NMS_V11
NMS_G703
1732E1
4 x 10/100/1000 BaseT
1732E1
1732E1
E1 PROTECTION BOX
Audio channels
+ +Service
Channel
V11 + G703
Plug in
(JAIDUSC)
Plugin
16 E1/DS1 plug in
1732E1 plugin
(JAIDUE1)
Ethernet data
plug in
Ethernet plugin
data
Ethernet
plug
E3/DS3
pluginin
16
E1/DS1
161732E1
E1/DS1 Plug
plug
in
plugin
(JAIDUE1)
E3/DS3 plug in
ECT
RS232
IDUODU
interface
OS (or ECT)
10/100 BaseT
IDUODU
interface
EPS
Interconnection cable
uPuP/ RC
EC
MUX/DEMUX
Main board
(JBIDUM)
MUX/DEMUX
Extension board
(JBIDUE)
PSU
Main IDU
PSU
Extension IDU
ODU
ODU
a)
ODU type:
In 9400AWY R.2.1.1, only the 64Mb V1 ETSI ODU types can be used.
Note for 9400AWY R.2.0 Customers only:
Neither the 32Mb ODU types (V1 and V2) nor the 64Mb V2 ODU types (used in 9400AWY R.2.0,
from V2.0.5) can be used in 9400AWY Rel.2.1.1 environment.
b)
c)
ODU unit
The ODU consists of a cabinet including the modem + transceiver of a channel. The mechanical
structure utilizes an outdoor IP67 cabinet.
Two mechanical solutions are adopted:
one for all frequency bands from 13 to 38 GHz, where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the
ODU cabinet; the only differences among the frequency bands are related to the diplexer and
the RF section;
another for all frequency bands from 7 to 8 GHz, where ODU is composed by two independent
units: the branching (diplexer) and the RF section (transceiver).
Modem: It consists of a baseband part and an IF part. The main functions are:
[2]
N.B.
AGC IF amplification
Upconversion to the RF Tx channel frequency
Transmit power control range of 30 dB
RF loopback (N.B.)
Double mixers at Rx side (the frequency of the signal sent to the modem board is 675 MHz
whatever the frequency band and shifter).
46 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[3]
Synthesizer unit
[4]
[5]
Microwave Diplexer: it is inserted between the front end and the antenna. Its scope is to filter
all interfering signals and harmonics. It consists of two bandpass filters: one for the Rx and one
for the Tx. The rejection between these two parts is more than 70 dB. The insertion losses are
less than 2 dB.
Solar shield
Even if the ODU has been designed to work without solar shield, this one is always delivered with
each ODU.
N.B.
Note : the ODU is qualified for a room temperature of +55 0C maximum. In case of solar
radiation (1120 W/m2), the maximum room temperature is reduced to +40 0C (ETS 300
01924.1). It assumes that the protection of the solar shield is 15 0C.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
47 / 592
ODU configurations
The ODU configurations available are:
1+0
1+1 HSB
1+1 HSB SD
1+1 FD AP
1+1 FD DA
ODU cabinet
RF channeling
Coupler
Antenna
1+0
NO
1+1 HSB
1/10 dB asymmetric
1+1 HSB SD
NO
1+1 FD AP
NO
1
(nonintegrated
only)
1+1 FD DA
NO
OR
Legend:
AP = Alternate polar
DA = Dual antenna
f)
ODU Coupler
The ODU coupler (shown in Fig. 43. on page 116 for 1338 GHz bands, and in Fig. 44. on page 117
for 78 GHz bands) is used in the 1+1 HSB configuration.
The 1+0 configuration is comprised of a simple diplexer inside the cabinet while the protected
configurations (1+1) are always comprised of two cabinets and one 1/10 dB asymmetric coupler for
HSB configuration.
The couplers are connected between the cabinets and the antenna.
48 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
e)
The HDB3 signal is an aggregate signal including the main signal, auxiliary signal and the IDUODU
service channels.
The bit rate of the aggregate signal is listed in the following table.
Tab. 5. Bit rate of the IDUODU signal on the cable
ETSI (2 to 16xE1) AWY configuration
39.168 Mbit/s
78.336 Mbit/s
The IDUODU cable is a standard coaxial cable whose characteristics are specified in para.15.5 on page
135.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
49 / 592
N.B.
for the detailed description of station layouts and equipment interconnections, refer to
para.32.2 from page 331 onwards.
one Outdoor Unit (ODU) incorporating the complete RF transceiver (modem, RF units, branching
filter) and an integrated or separated antenna.
The ODU is capacityindependent.
one Indoor Unit (MAIN IDU unit) incorporating the baseband processing and offering tributaries
interfacing as well as service channel and supervision.
The IDU is frequencyindependent.
1 x ODU
DISTRIBUTOR SHELF
interconnections
IDUODU cable
RT
the (1+0) IDU equipment provisioning (see point [7] on page 44, and and Tab. 6. on page 68)
and the employed Software Label (see Tab. 23. on page 93)
50 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
para.12.3.2.1 below:
para.12.3.2.2 on page 52 :
one optional Service Channels Protection Box (mandatory if the AUDIO + USER SERVICE
CHANNELS plugin is equipped)
the (1+1) IDU equipment provisioning (see point [7] on page 44, and Tab. 6. on page 68)
and the employed Software Label (see Tab. 23. on page 93)
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
51 / 592
According to the ODU configurations introduced in Tab. 4. on page 48, at radio level the following system
implementations are available:
FD double antenna AP
FD one antenna AP
N.B.
The radio configurations are independent from the IDU (1+1) configurations described in
previous para.12.3.2.1 on page 51.
IDU 1+1
interconnections
DISTRIBUTOR SHELF
ODU CH 1
HDB3
MODEM
IF
E1 PROTEC. SERV.CHAN.
BOX
PROTEC.BOX
RF
only one RT
transmits
ODU CH 0
MODEM
IF
RF
Fig. 11. 9400AWY (1+1 HSB SD) IDU + ODU block diagram
interconnections
IDU 1+1
DISTRIBUTOR SHELF
ODU CH 1
HDB3
MODEM
IF
E1 PROTEC. SERV.CHAN.
BOX
PROTEC.BOX
Coupler
RF
only one RT
transmits
1:1
0
ODU CH 0
MODEM
IF
RF
Fig. 12. 9400AWY (1+1 HSB one antenna) IDU + ODU block diagram
52 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
interconnections
DISTRIBUTOR SHELF
ODU CH 1
HDB3
MODEM
IF
E1 PROTEC. SERV.CHAN.
BOX
PROTEC.BOX
RF
both RTs
transmit
AP
ODU CH 0
MODEM
IF
RF
Fig. 13. 9400AWY (1+1 FD Double Antenna AP) IDU + ODU block diagram
IDU 1+1
ODU CH 1
HDB3
interconnections
IDU 1+1
DISTRIBUTOR SHELF
MODEM
IF
E1 PROTEC. SERV.CHAN.
BOX
PROTEC.BOX
RF
both RTs
transmit
MODEM
IF
RF
Fig. 14. 9400AWY (1+1 FD one antenna AP) IDU + ODU block diagram
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
53 / 592
The Local Operator can manage the Equipment software programs and most configuration data through
the Equipment Craft Terminal 1320CT connected to the Equipments F or Ethernet interface.
The Craft Terminal characteristics (computer configuration) are listed in para.31.1.1 on page 309.
The Craft Terminal is a project in charge of the local management of single network elements, providing
ITU compliant Information Model Interface to the Network Element.
Multiple NE management up to 50 Network elements is possible obtaining a remote Craft Terminal
application.
The general information on the Craft Terminal is presented in the:
1320CT Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook (see Tab. 78. on page 571)
12.4.1 ECT
AlcatelLucent TMN management products 1320 CT called Craft Terminals (CT) consists of a compatible
personal computer and application software specially developed for monitoring transmission equipment.
The CT designed to monitor a single transmission equipment is called Equipment Craft Terminal (ECT)
or 1320CT.
For each 9400AWY station an AlcatelLucent proprietary SWP (SoftWare Package) is employed, which
depends on the productrelease and the NE (Network Element) associated to the specific configuration.
12.4.2 RECT
The Remote Equipment Craft Terminal is a feature only present in the Single NE Link architecture which
allows the local operator, using an ECT connected to the F or Ethernet interface of the NE, to zoom and
perform a complete set of management operations on all the reachable NEs in the network.
The Remote NE can be physically reached through the NMS channels or Ethernet LAN.
RECT can be connected to any NE pertaining to the same area of the local NE and to any NE pertaining
to different areas (assuming that the DCN network has been correctly designed and hence interarea
communication is possible from networking viewpoint).
Of course, due to the limitation of the physical resources in the Equipment Controller of the NE, some
network design constraints must be taken into account as the total number of managed NEs (50).
54 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
the contemporaneous presence of the RECT function and an OS is possible. The access disable flag
avoids access conflict between the OS and both RECT and ECT on some operations as configuration
modification and remote control with access filtering.
b)
the NE which may be remotely controlled by a RECT must be configured and must be loaded with
the same SW version supporting the RECT function. A NE not supporting RECT function will refuse
the incoming association issued by a RECT and the ECT displays only local information.
c)
only three RECTs can be active at a time over one NE. The coexistence of ECTs and RECTs in the
whole network is guaranteed since the conflict in configuring the NEs is solved locally by the NE itself.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
55 / 592
Whole Equipment configuration data and programs are contained in the Flash Card, as shown in
Fig. 15. below:
SOFTWARE LABEL
Fixed Data
SW
COMMIT
VERSION
(ACTIVE)
SW instances
SW
STANDBY
VERSION
(not active)
MIB
NE Data
NE network
routing data
Fixed Data
The Software Label stored in the Flash Card (plugged into the IDU Main board as shown in
Fig. 21. on page 70 and Fig. 34. on page 94) allows flexibility in choosing user interfaces and
modulation as shown in Tab. 23. on page 93
The Software Label is strictly associated to the Flash Card Logistical Item, and cannot be
changeable, but with Flash Card upgrade (see para.47.3 on page 479).
[2]
SW instances
The SW COMMIT VERSION is that used by the system.
The SW STANDBY VERSION instance is created the first time a SW download from ECT to the NE
is carried out.
A new SWP download is envisaged whenever a new SWP package version or release (new with
respect to that presently loaded in the system) is supplied to Customer (*).
(*) for the meaning of SWP package version and release refer to para.57.3.2 on page 573.
As supplied by AlcatelLucent factory, unless differently required by Customer, the SWPversion
downloaded in Factory is the most recently released at the date of Flash Card delivery to the
Customer, so that the SW instances present in the flash card are:
the SW STANDBY, loaded with the SW version immediately previous (if any) with respect to
the COMMIT one
56 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[3]
NE data
N.B.
as shown in Fig. 15. on page 56, differently from SW instances, NE data are present as
single instances in the Flash Card.
a)
Base configuration
It is defined by Flash Card Logistical Item.
It is not changeable, but with Flash Card upgrade (see para.47.3 on page 479).
b)
MIB
Most (but not all) configuration data set is named MIB (Management Information Base).
Such data are defined by Craft Terminal and can be changed only within the limits (Base
configuration) implicitly defined by the employed Flash Card type.
As supplied by AlcatelLucent factory, the NE configuration data are set to default values
MIB can be saved as a file in the Craft Terminal (or OS) environment, as well can be restored
in the Flash Card retrieving this file from the Craft Terminal (or OS), as described in detail in
Chapter 214 MIB Management on page 301.
c)
Presently, all those listed parameter are NOT stored into the MIB file.
Nevertheless, it is possible to create, save and recover configuration files having the .qcml
extension (for details refer to para.32.3.6 on page 341). Such a file contains (besides other
data) the NE network routing data defined above.
As supplied by AlcatelLucent factory, the NE network routing data are set to default values.
[4]
after power off/on , with 2 to 5 minutes necessary for system startup after the power on.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
57 / 592
This paragraph introduces the basic information regarding the main phases for 9400AWY HW and SW
installation, and those regarding the software management, with particular emphasis on SWP release and
versions upgrading situations.
N.B.
Before reading this paragraph, it is suggested to read Flash Card types and content
(para.12.5 on page 56 ).
N.B.
Please refer to para.57.3.2 on page 573 for the meaning of SWP Release, Version and Patch
Level.
on page 59
on page 60
on page 62
on page 64
on page 64
on page 64
on page 65
58 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ECT INSTALLATION
described in:
HW INSTALLATION
described in:
9400AWY
Installation Handbook
or
Installation Guide
NE DATA SAVE
described in
para.12.6.8 on page 65
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
59 / 592
Fig. 17. depicts the main phases for SW management, when it is loaded the first time in PC and NE
environments.
SWP
CDROM
1)
CRAFT TERMINAL
2)
NEW SWP
INSTALLATION
6) MIB
BACKUP
3)
NE SWP LOADING
INTO EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
(if necessary)
DURATION (about):
30 minutes with
interface F
15 minutes with
Ethernet interface
4)
5) NE CONFIG.
DATA MNGT
7) MIB
RESTORE
AUTOMATIC SW
DOWNLOAD TO
SUPERVISOR UNITS
(if necessary)
DURATION:
some minutes
60 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(1) and (2) : SWP loading from CDROM to the Personal Computer, after which the PC
becomes and can be used as the Equipment Craft Terminal (abbreviated as ECT or CT)
(3) NE SWP downloading from ECT toward the NetworkElements Equipment Controller (EC),
if necessary (it is necessary if the NE SWversion is lower than that of the ECT)
N.B.
in general, firsttime system installation is carried out with the NEs flash card loaded
in factory with the same SWPversion of the ECT, so that this phase is usually not
necessary
(4) SW downloading from EC toward the Peripheral Units, always automatic (this phase is
carried out only whenever the SWversions present in the Peripheral Units are lower than those
available in the ECTs SW components)
(7) NE configuration data restore from Equipment Craft Terminal (MIB restore, if necessary)
At the end of the firsttime installation, the CT and NE situation is the standard one:
1)
Network Element already configured with the more recent SWP version and Craft
Terminal already available.
NE
ECT
ECT release = NE release
A.B.c
A.B.c
ECT version = NE version
This is the typical situation of new installations: the Network Element SW configuration matches
the available Craft Terminal SWP version, so that the NE can be loggedin and the Operator
can carry out the required operations, without any incompatibility problems.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
61 / 592
[1]
(2)
(1)
(3)
62 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[2]
2)
From the Menu Bar of the 9400AWY Main view that opens after NE Login (Fig. 87. on page
181), perform SW Download SW Status
V02.01.01
version committed
(active)
V02.01.00
N.B.
version standby
(not active)
When the equipment is shipped from factory, two SW versions are present in the flash card:
that committed is the actual SW version defined by the SWP name (e.g. V2.1.1)
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
63 / 592
The following situations require CT and/or NE upgrading, in order to reach the standard situation defined
in point 1 ) on page 61:
1)
Both Network Element and Craft Terminal already configured with a SWP version older
than that made available by the a new SWP version (SAME RELEASE)
NE
ECT
A.B.c
SWP
CDROM
A.B.d
This could be the typical situation of installations already running with A.B SWP package
(e.g.2.1.0), in the case a newer version of the same A.B SWP package has to be installed
(e.g.2.1.1).
In this case, you must upgrade both ECT and NE as described in Chapter 49 on page 495.
After that, the situation is equal to that of point 1 ) on page 61.
2)
Network Element already configured with the more recent SWP version, but the Craft
Terminal is not available or has a version older with respect to that of the Network
Element(s).
NE
ECT
ECT release = NE release
A.B.d
A.B.c
ECT version < NE version
In this case, carry out SWP installation in Craft Terminal environment as explained in Chapter
31 on page 309. After that, the situation is equal to that of point 1 ) on page 61.
for system upgrade purposes, replace the flash card currently in use with a different type
Flash Card
In this case, please refer to para.47.3 on page 479.
4)
for corrective maintenance purposes, replace the faulty flash card currently in use with a
spare Flash Card
In this case, please refer to Chapter 46 Spare Flash Card management and replacement
procedures on page 465
deinstall AlcatelLucent SW from the PC used as Craft terminal, refer to chapter 410 on
page 497.
64 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
data present in Flash Cards MIB bank [see point b ) on page 57]
Data present in Flash Cards MIB bank can be saved in a MIB backup file as described in Chapter
214 on page 301.
The same chapter explains how to recover MIB data from the MIB backup file.
The procedures in this handbook make often reference to the MIB data restore from the MIB backup
file. WARNING: read carefully para.12.6.9 below.
If you change the equipment configuration data without carrying out the MIB backup save, in case
of troubles you will have to create again the NE configuration data by means of a lot of individual ECT
commands, wasting time and with high probability of errors.
b)
data that are not saved in the MIB backup file [see point c ) on page 57]
Only NE network routing data are not saved in the MIB backup file.
Nevertheless, it is possible to create, save and recover configuration files having the .qcml
extension (for details refer to para.32.3.6 on page 341). Such a file contains (besides other data)
the NE network routing data. WARNING: read carefully para.12.6.9 below.
Procedure for .qcml file backup:
1)
2)
3)
4)
launch the TCO Suite SetUp Tool , as described in para.32.3.9 on page 345
in the screen of Fig. 244. on page 346 , click on button Get configuration from NE
the window in Fig. 245. on page 347 will appear. This window is the first step of the Quick
Configuration Procedure (interactive)
clicking repeatedly on Next buttons (without any other actions), reach Step L on page 368 and
click on Save As button: configuration data are saved in a configuration_name.qcml file
(provide a mnemonic name)
the TRS & SAT MSWord file. This can be used, in the future, to compare system performance to that
verified at the commissioning phase.
Maintain this folder updated whenever you make changes on the NE.
12.6.9 NE data compatibility between SWP 2.1.x versions
[1]
[2]
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
65 / 592
66 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
on page 68
on page 69
Ethernet tributaries
on page 76
on page 77
on page 78
on page 85
on page 88
on page 89
on page 90
on page 93
the Logistical Item corresponds to the Logistical Item code you can read on the IDUs label (see
Fig. 20. on page 69 )
please refer to the Installation Handbook for the provisioning of cables and other items that depend
on the installation choices.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
67 / 592
16E1 +
AUDIO &
USC
32E1
16E1 +
4 ETH
16E1+
4 ETH +
AUDIO &
USC
32E1
32E1 +
AUDIO &
USC
3DB16058ABXX
3DB16160AAXX
3DB16162AAXX
X
3DB16041ABXX
3DB16059ABXX
3DB16045ABXX
EXT IDU 32E1 48/60V PSU
PROTECTION BOXES
Only for 1+1 configurations
3DB16102AAXX
3DB16103AAXX
X
X
332
333
68 / 592
X
X
334
335
336
337
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
MEANING
9400AWY
CE
12345 (example)
Notified body
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
69 / 592
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Fig. 21. IDU Main Unit front and rear views
Tab. 7. IDU Main Unit: external interfaces list
Ref.
Fig. 21.
Interface / Explanation
Details
para.13.3.2
on page 74
SubD 3 Male
(2)
(3)
RJ45
OS (or ECT) 10/100BaseT
para.13.3.4
on page 75
(4)
Debug RJ45
For
Factory use only
(N.B.2)
(9)
Acknowledgement: Alarm
attending pushbutton; this
pushbutton turns OFF LEDs
MAJ/MIN and turns ON
yellow LED ATTD
para.45.6.2
on page 434
(10)
Equipment Controller
Reset pushbutton
(11)
para.44.2.1
on page 421
(8)
N 50 ohm Female
70 / 592
I
O
ON
OFF
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Ref.
Fig. 21.
Interface / Explanation
Details
(12)
SubD 9
para.13.3.3
on page 75
(13)
116E1 64 wires
(N.B.1)
(14)
interconnection with
Extension Unit,
no pin usage by
Customer
(15)
SubD 44 Female
(N.B.1)
(16)
9 LEDs
para.13.3.1
on page 73
Flash Card
para.13.7
on page 93
(17) + (18)
+ (A)
(B)
label
(C)
label
unit identification
Fig. 20.
on page 69
(5)
para.13.3.5
on page 76
1732 E1 64 wires,
when the 1732 E1 plugin
is equipped
(N.B.1)
Connectors present only when the Audio + User Service Channel plugin is
equipped (N.B.3) :
SubD 44 Female
(6) + (7)
(N.B.1)
chapter 42
on page 413
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
71 / 592
(N.B.1)
(N.B.2)
(N.B.3)
When no plugin equipped, the slot is closed by a metal plate (inside the panel rear
side).
Metal plate is mandatory to ensure EMIEMC performance
72 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Notes to Tab. 7.
1) ON
2) RDI
3) MIN
4) EOW
5) ODU W
6) ATTD
7) MAJ
8) LDI
9) ANT
GREEN
RED
GREEN
RED
GREEN
RED
YELLOW
RED
YELLOW
= Power ON (green)
= Remote Defect Indication (red)
= Minor Alarm (red)
= Engineering Order Wire (bicolor: yellow if busy; green if free)
= ODU Working (green)
= Attended (yellow)
= Major Alarm (red)
= Local Defect Indication (red)
= Not operative in current SWP version
Fig. 22. LEDs on the IDU Main Unit front panel
[1]
ON This green LED is ON when the Station Battery is connected, the ON/OFF switch is ON, and
the internal DC/DC is working properly.
[2]
RDI The Remote Defect Indication is a local indication of the Remote Equipment Failure alarms
requiring consequent operator intervention. It is transmitted from the remote station to the local via
the aggregate radio frame. RDI is formed in the remote station by the following roots:
[3]
MIN Minor Alarm is the sum of the alarms to which the customer associates, via ECT/NMS, a
MINOR severity.
[4]
EOW This LED refers to the use of the EOW. Refer to chapter 42 on page 413 for details.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
73 / 592
ODUW The ODUW led ON identifies the TX activity of the ODU connected to the MAIN unit.
It is OFF in case of:
[6]
ATTD The attended LED is ON when the acknowledgement button [position (9) in Fig. 21. on page
70 ] has been pushed
[7]
MAJ Major Alarm is the sum of the alarms to which the customer associates, via ECT/NMS, a high
severity (MAJOR or CRITICAL).
[8]
LDI The Local Defect Indication (LDI) has the purpose to show Local Equipment Failure requiring
consequent actions by operators. The LDI roots are:
The lamp test pushbutton [position (11) in Fig. 21. on page 70 ] allows the HW test of all LEDs.
13.3.2 Power Supply connector pinout (MAIN and EXTENSION units)
Tab. 8. Power supply connections
Pin
Function
A1
+ BATTERY
A2
GROUND
A3
BATTERY
74 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[5]
RS 232
(IDU MAIN side)
(PC side)
N.B.
RJ45
Signal
Color used
Tx +
White/Orange
Tx
Orange
Rx +
White/Green
Not used
Blue
Not used
White/Blue
Rx
Green
Not used
White/Brown
Not used
Brown
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(OS side)
75 / 592
Present on the front panel of the IDU Main Unit [position (5) in Fig. 21. on page 70 ] when the Enhanced
Ethernet plugin is equipped.
For the Ethernet user data interfaces the following table summarizes the meaning of the LEDs integrated
in the RJ45 connectors:
Tab. 11. RJ45 connectors leds for Ethernet user data interfaces
Color
Display
Function
Ledoff
Ledon
Led blinking
LEFT LED
Green
Link and
activity status
Link down
Link up
RIGHT LED
Yellow
activity
No TX/RX
activity
detected
TX/RX activity
detected
76 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Interface / Explanation
Details
para.13.3.2
on page 74
SubD 3 Male
(2)
(3)
para.44.2.1
on page 421
116E1 64 wires
(N.B.1)
(5)
interconnection with
Main Unit,
no pin usage by
Customer
(6)
SubD 44 Female
(N.B.1)
(7)
3 LEDs
para.13.4.1
on page 78
(8)
N 50 ohm Female
(N.B.2)
(B)
label
(C)
label
unit identification
Fig. 20.
on page 69
(4)
I
O
ON
OFF
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1732 E1 64 wires
(N.B.1)
77 / 592
Interface / Explanation
Details
Notes
(N.B.1)
(N.B.2)
(N.B.3)
When no plugin equipped, the slot is closed by a metal plate (inside the panel rear
side).
Metal plate is mandatory to ensure EMIEMC performance
GREEN
1) ON
2) ODU W
3) ANT
GREEN
Power ON (green)
This green LED is ON when the Station Battery is connected, the ON/OFF switch is
ON, and the internal DC/DC is working properly.
=
ODU Working (green).
The ODUW led ON identifies the TX activity of the ODU connected to the
EXTENSION unit.
It is OFF in case of:
The lamp test pushbutton [position (3) in Fig. 23. on page 77 ] allows the HW test of all LEDs.
78 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Ref.
Fig. 23.
Line Side
Equipment Side
Fig. 25. E1 Protection box: views of Equipment Side and Line Side connectors
Tab. 13. Equipment Side and Line Side connectors of E1 Protection box
Ref.
Fig. 25.
Connector
Interface
To be connected to
Line side
(1)
18 E1
(2)
(3)
916 E1
SubD 37 Female
(4)
1724 E1
2532 E1
Equipment side
(5)
116 E1
(6)
116 E1
1732 E1
1732 E1
(7)
(8)
N.B.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
79 / 592
for E1 tributaries the same input and output wires are used for 120 ohm (balanced) and 75 ohm
(unbalanced); the selection between the two options is possible with CT/OS
pins must be connected to the station DDF, directly or through distribution shelves (see Fig. 3. on
page 40 )
Tab. 14. E1 tributaries (1 to 8) connector pinout
pin 1
Description
Pin #
Pin #
Description
Not Used
20
Not Used
IN+
Trib.
21
IN
Trib.
IN+
Trib.
22
IN
Trib.
IN+
Trib.
23
IN
Trib.
IN+
Trib.
24
IN
Trib.
IN+
Trib.
25
IN
Trib.
IN+
Trib.
26
IN
Trib.
IN+
Trib.
27
IN
Trib.
IN+
Trib.
28
IN
Trib.
GND
10
Not Used
11
29
Not Used
Out+
Trib.
12
30
Out
Trib.
Out+
Trib.
13
31
Out
Trib.
Out+
Trib.
14
32
Out
Trib.
Out+
Trib.
15
33
Out
Trib.
Out+
Trib.
16
34
Out
Trib.
Out+
Trib.
17
35
Out
Trib.
Out+
Trib.
18
36
Out
Trib.
Out+
Trib.
19
37
Out
Trib.
80 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Description
Pin #
Pin #
Description
Not Used
20
Not Used
IN+
Trib.
21
IN
Trib.
IN+
Trib.
10
22
IN
Trib.
10
IN+
Trib.
11
23
IN
Trib.
11
IN+
Trib.
12
24
IN
Trib.
12
IN+
Trib.
13
25
IN
Trib.
13
IN+
Trib.
14
26
IN
Trib.
14
IN+
Trib.
15
27
IN
Trib.
15
IN+
Trib.
16
28
IN
Trib.
16
GND
10
Not Used
11
29
Not Used
Out+
Trib.
12
30
Out
Trib.
Out+
Trib.
10
13
31
Out
Trib.
10
Out+
Trib.
11
14
32
Out
Trib.
11
Out+
Trib.
12
15
33
Out
Trib.
12
Out+
Trib.
13
16
34
Out
Trib.
13
Out+
Trib.
14
17
35
Out
Trib.
14
Out+
Trib.
15
18
36
Out
Trib.
15
Out+
Trib.
16
19
37
Out
Trib.
16
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
81 / 592
pin 1
Description
Pin #
Pin #
Description
Not Used
20
Not Used
IN+
Trib.
17
21
IN
Trib.
17
IN+
Trib.
18
22
IN
Trib.
18
IN+
Trib.
19
23
IN
Trib.
19
IN+
Trib.
20
24
IN
Trib.
20
IN+
Trib.
21
25
IN
Trib.
21
IN+
Trib.
22
26
IN
Trib.
22
IN+
Trib.
23
27
IN
Trib.
23
IN+
Trib.
24
28
IN
Trib.
24
GND
10
Not Used
11
29
Not Used
Out+
Trib.
17
12
30
Out
Trib.
17
Out+
Trib.
18
13
31
Out
Trib.
18
Out+
Trib.
19
14
32
Out
Trib.
19
Out+
Trib.
20
15
33
Out
Trib.
20
Out+
Trib.
21
16
34
Out
Trib.
21
Out+
Trib.
22
17
35
Out
Trib.
22
Out+
Trib.
23
18
36
Out
Trib.
23
Out+
Trib.
24
19
37
Out
Trib.
24
82 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Description
Pin #
Pin #
Description
Not Used
20
Not Used
IN+
Trib.
25
21
IN
Trib.
25
IN+
Trib.
26
22
IN
Trib.
26
IN+
Trib.
27
23
IN
Trib.
27
IN+
Trib.
28
24
IN
Trib.
28
IN+
Trib.
29
25
IN
Trib.
29
IN+
Trib.
30
26
IN
Trib.
30
IN+
Trib.
31
27
IN
Trib.
31
IN+
Trib.
32
28
IN
Trib.
32
GND
10
Not Used
11
29
Not Used
Out+
Trib.
25
12
30
Out
Trib.
25
Out+
Trib.
26
13
31
Out
Trib.
26
Out+
Trib.
27
14
32
Out
Trib.
27
Out+
Trib.
28
15
33
Out
Trib.
28
Out+
Trib.
29
16
34
Out
Trib.
29
Out+
Trib.
30
17
35
Out
Trib.
30
Out+
Trib.
31
18
36
Out
Trib.
31
Out+
Trib.
32
19
37
Out
Trib.
32
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
83 / 592
Line Side
Equipment Side
Fig. 26. Services Protection box: views of Equipment Side and Line Side connectors
Tab. 18. Equipment Side and Line Side connectors of Services Protection box
Ref.
Fig. 25.
Connector
Interface
To be connected to
(1)
Alarms +
Housekeeping
(2)
NMS V.11 +
Audio 1
(3)
NMS G.703 +
Audio 2
(3)
User Service
Channels
Audio1/2 +
G703_V11 User
Service Channel
Audio1/2 +
G703_V11 User
Service Channel
Alarms
Housekeeping
NMS
Line side
SubD 15 Female
Equipment side
(5)
(6)
(7)
N.B.
SubD 44 Female
N.B.
84 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3 summarizing discrete alarms equipment outputs (A_1 to A_3); see point [1] below
4 housekeeping controls equipment outputs (HK_O1 to HK_O4); see point [2] on page 86
6 housekeeping alarms equipment inputs (HK_I1 to HK_I6; see point [4] on page 87
1 ground (GND).
N.B.
the SW User Label depicted in Tab. 19. below represents the name by which each signal is
identified by the External Points Management (see chapter 27 on page 247), and Quick
Configuration Procedure External Input and Output Points configuration on page 367.
Tab. 19. Alarms Housekeeping connector pinout
pin 1
[1]
Pin
Signal
Direction
SW User Label
HK_I1
INPUT
CPI1
13
HK_I2
INPUT
CPI2
HK_I3
INPUT
CPI3
14
HK_I4
INPUT
CPI4
HK_I5
INPUT
CPI5
15
HK_I6
INPUT
CPI6
HK_O1
OUTPUT
CPO1
11
HK_O2
OUTPUT
CPO2
HK_O3
OUTPUT
CPO3
12
HK_O4
OUTPUT
CPO4
COM
A_1
OUTPUT
FAIL IDU
A_2
OUTPUT
A_3
OUTPUT
10
GND
IDU HW Failure alarm ( = IDU Main (or Extension unit) Card fail/missing + Loss of
IDUODU cable + Loss of Tributaries)
A_2
A_3
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
85 / 592
HOUSEKEEPING CONTROLS
For the 4 housekeeping controls (equipment outputs), it is possible to choose through CT not only
the manual setting of each one of them, but also the association to one of the system alarms available
in the CT menu lists (including: Major Alarm, Minor Alarm, Loss of Tributaries, Loss of IDUODU
cable, Remote Defect Indication, Local Defect Indication, ODU alarm, Service Affecting Alarm,
Signal Failure Alarm).
For electrical characteristics refer to point [3] herebelow.
[3]
alarm present the relay is closed: |V2| 2V, |I2| 50mA (the limit on the current defines
the maximum current supported by the IDU circuit)
alarm not present the relay is open: |I2| 0.2mA, |V2| 60V
The limit on the voltage means that the customer is not allowed to force in this condition too large
V2.
IDU
OUTn
ooo
ooo
OUT2
I1
OUT1
V1
OUTCommon
86 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[2]
[4]
EQUIPMENT INPUTS
The IDU is able to detect the status of commands coming from customers circuits.
A common (in) signal is supplied by the customers circuit, and this signal is different from the one
defined for equipment outputs.
The customer can use two different schemes to provide the command:
[case 1] relay
[case 2] open collector
Case 1 (relay)
IDU
customer
in n
ooo
I3
ooo
out
in 1
V4
V3
common (in)
customer
ground
Fig. 28. Equipment inputs relay scheme
IDU
customer
in n
ooo
I3
ooo
V4
in 1
V3
common (in)
customer
ground
alarm present the customer transistor conduces (= closed): 2V V4 0V, |I3| 10mA.
alarm not present the customer transistor doesnt conduce (=open): |I3| 0.2mA.
This limits the max current that the customers circuit can drain.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
87 / 592
The (NMS_V11+Audio1) interface has 9 pins dedicated to NMS and 6 pins dedicated to EOW analog
party line.
The NMS_V11 channel is a 64Kb/s; its working mode can be selected between:
DTE: the data in and data out have to be synchronous, data out being the slave,
Description
Pin #
Pin #
Description
RS422 data in ()
10
RS422 clock in ()
11
12
GND NMS
13
14
15
Not used
GND Audio
88 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
DTE: G703 data in and G703 data out have to be synchronous, G703 data out being the slave,
CODIR (asynchronous): G703 data in and G703 data out are totally asynchronous (this mode
includes DCE behavior),
Inframe: this configuration both disables the NMS_G703 interface and enables the
insertion/extraction into/from the first E1 of the 64Kbit/s channel comingfrom/towards the uP.
The insertion/extraction is relative to any slot of the first tributary.
This setting is not applicable with unframed E1.
Moreover, it is also necessary that the farend E1 is enabled and successfully provisioned.
pin 1
Description
Pin #
Pin #
Description
G703 data in ()
Not used
10
Not used
11
Not used
12
Not used
GND NMS
13
14
15
Not used
GND Audio
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
89 / 592
User service channel can be used in one of the following modes (selectable by CT/OS):
pin 1
N.B.
Pin #
Signal
Direction
COD_RX +
INPUT
COD_RX
INPUT
COD_TX +
OUTPUT
10
COD_TX
OUTPUT
RX_ASY
INPUT
11
TX_ASY
OUTPUT
CC_RX +
INPUT
12
CC_RX
INPUT
RX_CK +
BID
13
RX_CK
BID
CC_TX +
OUTPUT
14
CC_TX
OUTPUT
CC_TCK +
OUTPUT
15
CC_TCK
OUTPUT
GND
The use of signals is depicted in following figures Fig. 30. to Fig. 33.
90 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
For V11 codirectional mode, refer to Fig. 30. for the interface description vs pinout.
USER SERVICE CHANNEL V11 CODIR
< USER
RADIO >
IDU AWY
USER EQUIPMENT
DATA
CC_RX +
CC_RX
CLOCK
RX_CK +
RX_CK
CC_TX +
CC_TX
DATA
CC_TCK +
CC_TCK
CLOCK
RADIO >
IDU AWY
USER SUBORDINATE
EQUIPMENT (DTE)
DCE
DATA
CC_RX +
CC_RX
CLOCK
RX_CK +
RX_CK
CC_TX +
CC_TX
CC_TCK +
CC_TCK
DATA
CLOCK
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
91 / 592
RADIO >
IDU AWY
USER EQUIPMENT
COD_RX+
COD_RX
DATA&CLOCK
COD_TX+
COD_TX
DATA&CLOCK
RADIO >
USER EQUIPMENT
DATA&CLOCK
IDU AWY
RX_ASY
TX_ASY
DATA&CLOCK
92 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
For G.703 mode, refer to Fig. 32. for the interface description vs pinout.
Modulation
2E1, 4E1
4QAM
2E1
4QAM
4E1
4QAM or 16QAM
4QAM
2E1
4QAM
4E1, 8E1
4QAM or 16QAM
4QAM
2E1
4QAM
4QAM or 16QAM
2E1
4QAM
4QAM or 16QAM
32E1
16QAM
3DB16080ABXX :
3DB16082ABXX :
3DB16084ABXX :
3DB16085ABXX :
The limitations introduced by the Software Label are related only to frame structure and modulation
configuration.
There are no limits related to the NE Configuration type (1+0 or 1+1) . Software Label value and NE
Configuration type are independent.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
93 / 592
13.7.2.1 General
The Flash Card is housed inside the IDU Main Unit shelf [see position (17) in Fig. 21. on page 70 ].
Fig. 34. herebelow shows the FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
CONNECTOR SIDE
INSERTION
BOTTOM SIDE
the Flash Card Logistical Item and Software Label are reported on the label affixed on it;
b)
moreover, the Software Label is affixed on the label present on the front panel of the IDU Main Unit
(position (A) in Fig. 21. on page 70):
For this purpose, the Flash Card plastic bag contains another selfadhesive label, equal to that
affixed on the Flash Card itself, that can be cut as shown below, to obtain the label to be affixed on
the front panel of the IDU Main Unit
flash card Software Label
c)
moreover, the Software Label can be verified by Operators Commands: see Fig. 159. on page 256
and Fig. 72. on page 166
94 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
LABEL AFFIXED ON
THE FLASH CARD
E
H
A
F
G
H
FIELD
A
WRITING (EXAMPLES)
3DB16084ABXX
B
C
MEANING
N.B.
n.b.1
Software Label
3DB16084ABAA 01
V2.1.0/V2.1.1
n.b.1
n.b.2
H
n.b.1
n.b.2
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
95 / 592
Logistical Item
Technical Description
[1]
3CC07946AAXX
Telephone Handset
[2]
3DB01398AAXX
[3]
3DB01397AAXX
[4]
3DB01399AAXX
96 / 592
N.B.
a
b
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
on page 98
on page 99
ODU configurations
on page 100
on page 101
on page 104
on page 105
on page 108
Antenna configurations
on page 113
on page 119
For the Light service kit cable, please refer to para.32.10 on page 405.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
97 / 592
The ODU consists of one or two cabinets including the modem + transceiver + branching of a channel.
Two mechanical solutions are adopted:
one with external diplexer, where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the ODU cabinet; each of this
type of ODU is identified by one Logistical Item only
another with embedded diplexer, where ODU is composed by two independent units: the
BRANCHING assembly (containing the diplexer) and the TRANSCEIVER assembly (containing the
RF section); each of this type of ODU is identified by two Logistical Items, one for the BRANCHING
assembly and another for the TRANSCEIVER assembly. To read the BRANCHING assembly
identification label it is necessary to separate the BRANCHING assembly from the TRANSCEIVER
assembly.
Dimensions
Weight
external diplexer
TRANSCEIVER
+ BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER
+ BRANCHING
235 x 235 x 72 mm
(9.25 x 9.25 x 2.8in)
248 x 257 x 93 mm
(9.76 x 10.1 x 3.7in)
BRANCHING
BRANCHING
IDENTIFICATION LABEL
(INSIDE)
(see Fig. 52. on page 126)
TRANSCEIVER
+
BRANCHING
ODU IDENTIFICATION LABEL
(see Fig. 37. on page 99)
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
IDENTIFICATION LABEL
(see Fig. 37. on page 99)
98 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
the following label is affixed externally to all types of ODU and ODUs TRANSCEIVER boxes (see
Fig. 46. on page 120 and Fig. 47. on page 121):
A
B
MEANING
A9400
CE
55
1.5A
Shifter
TX Subband
b)
only for ODUs with external diplexers, an additional label is placed on the branching assembly (for
details refer to Fig. 50. and Fig. 52. on pages 124126).
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
99 / 592
1+0
ODU
ODU coupler
1 x ODU
APPLICATIONS AND
ADVANTAGES
ANTENNA
NO
Nonprotected
1/10 dB
asymmetric
Protection against
failures
2 x ODUs at
1+1 HSB SD same
frequency
NO
1+1 FD AP
2 x ODUs at
different
frequencies
NO
1+1 FD DA
2 x ODUs at
different
frequencies
NO
1+1 HSB
N.B.
2 x ODUs at
same
frequency
Protection against
failures.
Improvement of
performances
versus multipath
propagation
Legend:
AP:
DA:
FD:
HSB:
SD:
Alternate Polar
Double Antenna
Frequency diversity
Hot Stand By
Space Diversity
100 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
b)
c)
Part list of full integrated antennas, ODU accessories and installation materials: refer to
Installation Handbook
Antenna (2)
ODU CH 1
ODU CH 0
to IDU EXTENSION UNIT
N.B.
Figure shows the solution with full integrated antennas; antennas can be also external (see
point b ) herebelow)
Fig. 38. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSBSD or FDDA AP with two antennas
Equipment provisioning:
a)
b)
c)
Part list of full integrated antennas, ODU accessories and installation materials (x2): refer to
Installation Handbook
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
101 / 592
COUPLER
ANTENNA
ODU CH 0
ODU CH 1
this drawing is an example referred to the coupler used in 1338 GHz configurations.
Couplers used in 78 GHz configurations are shown in Fig. 44. on page 117.
Fig. 39. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSB with one antenna
Equipment provisioning:
a)
b)
c)
Part list of full integrated antennas, ODU accessories and installation materials: refer to
Installation Handbook
102 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
14.4.2.3 ODU (1+1) FDAP with one double polar external antenna
Double Polar Antenna
ODU CH 0
ODU CH 1
to IDU MAIN UNIT
Fig. 40. Station layout of ODU (1+1) FDAP with one double polar external antenna
Equipment provisioning:
a)
b)
Connection of Double Polar External Antenna: see para.14.6.4 on page 117 (Configuration
with separated antenna)
c)
Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials: refer to the Installation Handbook
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
103 / 592
Logistical Item
Corresponds to the Logistical Item code you can read on the ODUs
label (see Fig. 37. on page 99 )
Technical Description
Note: The ODU Logistical Items listed in the following tables include always the solar shield.
For:
104 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Port A
Port C
Port B
Each BRANCHING assembly has two different variants by duplex spacing, depending on the RF_Tx
output frequency band as described on the table below :
3DB Variant
Channel
1_1p
2_2p
The arrangement between each filters on the same branching device is described below:
f1
foL
f2
f3
foH
f4
frequencies
2.5 dB
70 dB
attenuation
WARNING:
fr SHIFTER
f1, f2, f3 and f4 frequencies of the branching filters refer to the extreme channel
frequencies and not to the cutoff frequencies of the filters.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
105 / 592
Logistical Item
Technical Description
3DB 06691ABXX
3DB 06692ABXX
Shifter
MHz
Central
Freq.
MHz
154
Filter 1 MHz
(Lower Band)
Filter 2 MHz
(Upper Band)
BRANCHING ASSEMBLY
Low
Limit
f1
High
Limit
f2
Low
Limit
f3
High
Limit
f4
Logistical Item
Technical Description
BRANCHING 7GHZ ...
7212,0
7107,0
7163,0
7261,0
7317,0
154
7547,0
7428,0
7512,0
7582,0
7666,0
154
7603,0
7484,0
7568,0
7638,0
7722,0
3DB 06774ABXX
154
7561,0
7442,0
7526,0
7596,0
7680,0
160
7561,0
7442,0
7520,0
7602,0
7680,0
154
7617,0
7498,0
7582,0
7652,0
7736,0
160
7617,0
7498,0
7576,0
7658,0
7736,0
161
7240,0
7124,5
7194,5
7285,5
7355,5
161
7310,0
7194,5
7264,5
7355,5
7425,5
3DB 06780ABXX
161
7365,0
7249,5
7319,5
7410,5
7480,5
161
7435,0
7319,5
7389,5
7480,5
7550,5
3DB 06781ABXX
161
7390,0
7274,5
7344,5
7435,5
7505,5
161
7460,0
7344,5
7414,5
7505,5
7575,5
3DB 06782ABXX
161
7540,0
7424,5
7494,5
7585,5
7655,5
161
7610,0
7494,5
7564,5
7655,5
7725,5
3DB 06783ABXX
161
7665,0
7549,5
7619,5
7710,5
7780,5
161
7735,0
7619,5
7689,5
7780,5
7850,5
3DB 06784ABXX
161
7690,0
7574,5
7644,5
7735,5
7805,5
161
7760,0
7644,5
7714,5
7805,5
7875,5
3DB 06785ABXX
168
7299,0
7187,0
7243,0
7355,0
7411,0
168
7569,0
7443,0
7527,0
7611,0
7695,0
168
7625,0
7499,0
7583,0
7667,0
7751,0
3DB 06776ABXX
182
7547,0
7414,0
7498,0
7596,0
7680,0
182
7603,0
7470,0
7554,0
7652,0
7736,0
3DB 06777ABXX
196
7247,0
7107,0
7191,0
7303,0
7387,0
196
7303,0
7163,0
7247,0
7359,0
7443,0
3DB 06778ABXX
245
7606,5
7428,0
7540,0
7673,0
7785,0
245
7718,5
7540,0
7652,0
7785,0
7897,0
3DB 06779ABXX
3DB 06775ABXX
106 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Logistical Item
Technical Description
3DB 06693ABXX
3DB 06694ABXX
Shifter
MHz
119
Central
Freq.
MHz
8366.5
Filter 1 MHz
(Lower Band)
Filter 2 MHz
(Upper Band)
Low
Limit
f1
High
Limit
f2
Low
Limit
f3
High
Limit
f4
8286.0
8328.0
8405.0
8447.0
BRANCHING ASSEMBLY
Logistical Item
Technical Description
BRANCHING 8GHZ ...
... CH11P P.SH.119 MHz
8366.5
8282.5
8324.5
8408.5
8450.5
119
8408.5
8328.0
8370.0
8447.0
8489.0
126
8408.5
8324.5
8366.5
8450.5
8492.5
151.610
8315.010
8204.217
8274.189
8355.831
8425.803
151.610
8384.982
8274.189
8344.161
8425.803
8495.775
3DB 06787ABXX
208
8217.0
8064.0
8162.0
8272.0
8370.0
208
8301.0
8148.0
8246.0
8356.0
8454.0
3DB 10073ABXX
266
8097.5
7905.0
8024.0
8171.0
8290.0
266
8209.5
8017.0
8136.0
8283.0
8402.0
3DB 06788ABXX
... CH11P
P.SH.294/305/311 MHZ
3DB 06786ABXX
... CH22P
P.SH.294/305/311 MHZ
294.440
305.560
7749.755
7947.835
311.320
311.320
7738.635
8145.915
7851.475
294.440
7851.475
7862.965
305.560
8162.795
8281.395
8264.515
7970.075
8157.405
7851.845
8147.0
8157.035
8162.795
8063.740
213.5
8044.195
7732.875
8066.435
8035.0
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
8275.635
8046.0
8248.0
8259.0
107 / 592
The following tables report the Logistical Items of the available ODUs (with embedded diplexer) with the
following information from left to right:
Column 1:
Column 1bis :
Column 2 & 3:
Column 4 to 7:
Shifter (MHz)
Central Frequency (MHz)
Tx and Rx subbands
Tx & Rx frequency ranges at RF interface (MHz)
ODU with variable shifter: the shifter value can be set by Craft Terminal
1bis
Shifter
CF
Tx
Rx
RF Tx
min
RF Tx
max
RF Rx
min
RF Rx
max
12807.5
1p
12750
12865
13016
13131
3CC13688ABXX
12920.5
2p
12861
12980
13127
13246
3CC13689ABXX
13073.5
1p
13016
13131
12750
12865
3CC13690ABXX
13186.5
2p
13127
13246
12861
12980
3CC13691ABXX
Logistical Item
266
108 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1bis
Shifter
CF
Tx
Rx
RF Tx
min
RF Tx
max
RF Rx
min
RF Rx
max
14698
1p
14630
14766
14945
15081
3CC13692ABXX
14829,5
2p
14760
14899
15075
15214
3CC13693ABXX
15013
1p
14945
15081
14630
14766
3CC13694ABXX
15144,5
2p
15075
15214
14760
14899
3CC13695ABXX
14612
1p
14500
14724
14920
15144
3CC13696ABXX
14825,5
2p
14710
14941
15130
15361
3CC13697ABXX
15032
1p
14920
15144
14500
14724
3CC13698ABXX
15245,5
2p
15130
15361
14710
14941
3CC13699ABXX
14517,5
1p
14400
14635
14890
15125
3CC13704ABXX
14742,5
2p
14625
14860
15115
15350
3CC13705ABXX
15007,5
1p
14890
15125
14400
14635
3CC13706ABXX
15232,5
2p
15115
15350
14625
14860
3CC13707ABXX
14600
1p
14500
14700
15144
15344
3CC13709ABXX
15244
1p
15144
15344
14500
14700
3CC13711ABXX
14560
1p
14500
14620
15228
15348
3CC13712ABXX
15288
1p
15228
15348
14500
14620
3CC13713ABXX
Logistical Item
315
420
490
644
728
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
109 / 592
1bis
RF Tx
max
RF Rx
min
RF Rx
max
Logistical Item
CF
Tx
Rx
RF Tx
min
18640,5
1p
18581
18700
18921
19040
3CC13714ABXX
18760,5
2p
18701
18820
19041
19160
3CC13715ABXX
18980
1p
18920
19040
18580
18700
3CC13716ABXX
19100
2p
19040
19160
18700
18820
3CC13717ABXX
17920
1p
17700
18140
19260
19700
3CC12995ABXX
19480
1p
19260
19700
17700
18140
3CC12996ABXX
340
1560
ETSI
1bis
Shifter
CF
Tx
Rx
RF Tx
min
RF Tx
max
RF Rx
min
RF Rx
max
1008
17951,5
17703
18200
18711
19208
1p
17700
18201
18710
19211
18182
18679
19190
19687
18180
18690
19190
19700
18711
19208
17703
18200
18710
19211
17700
18201
19190
19687
18182
18679
19190
19700
18180
18690
1010
17950,5
1008
18430,5
2
1010
18435
1008
18959,5
1p
1010
18960,5
1008
19438,5
2p
1010
19445
3CC14780ABXX
2p
3CC14781ABXX
3CC14782ABXX
3CC14783ABXX
110 / 592
Logistical Item
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1bis
Shifter
CF
Tx
Rx
RF Tx
min
RF Tx
max
RF Rx
min
RF Rx
max
22157,5
1p
22000
22315
23008
23323
3CC13718ABXX
22450
2p
22300
22600
23308
23608
3CC13719ABXX
23165,5
1p
23008
23323
22000
22315
3CC13720ABXX
23458
2p
23308
23608
22300
22600
3CC13721ABXX
Logistical Item
1008
1bis
Shifter
CF
Tx
Rx
RF Tx
min
RF Tx
max
RF Rx
min
RF Rx
max
1200
21509,5
21200
21819
22400
23019
1p
3CC14776ABXX
1232
21492,5
21198
21787
22430
23019
1050
22306
22252
22360
23302
23410
1200
22090,5
21781
22400
22981
23600
1232
22074,5
21781
22368
23013
23600
1200
22709,5
22400
23019
21200
21819
1p
2p
22724,5
22400
23019
21200
21819
1050
23356
23302
23410
22252
22360
1200
23290,5
22981
23600
21781
22400
1232
23306,5
23013
23600
21781
22368
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3CC14777ABXX
3CC14778ABXX
1232
2p
Logistical Item
3CC14779ABXX
111 / 592
1bis
Shifter
CF
Tx
Rx
RF Tx
min
RF Tx
max
RF Rx
min
RF Rx
max
24768,5
1p
24540
24997
25548
26005
3CC13734ABXX
25221
2p
24994
25448
26002
26456
3CC13735ABXX
25776,5
1p
25548
26005
24540
24997
3CC13736ABXX
26229
2p
26002
26456
24994
25448
3CC13737ABXX
Logistical Item
1008
1bis
Shifter
CF
Tx
Rx
RF Tx
min
RF Tx
max
RF Rx
min
RF Rx
max
27767
1p
27540
27994
28548
29002
3CC13738ABXX
28221
2p
27994
28448
29002
29456
3CC13739ABXX
28775
1p
28548
29002
27540
27994
3CC13740ABXX
29229
2p
29002
29456
27994
28448
3CC13741ABXX
Logistical Item
1008
1bis
Shifter
CF
Tx
Rx
RF Tx
min
RF Tx
max
RF Rx
min
RF Rx
max
37335
1p
37050
37620
38310
38880
3CC12987ABXX
37899,5
2p
37619
38180
38879
39440
3CC12988ABXX
38595
1p
38310
38880
37050
37620
3CC12989ABXX
39159,5
2p
38879
39440
37619
38180
3CC12990ABXX
Logistical Item
1260
112 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
For the list of full integrated antennas (types, P/Ns and related information), please refer
to the Installation Handbook.
a separated antenna, if larger diameters are necessary. In this case, the antenna is interconnected
by a flextwist directly to the ODU, or the coupler, depending on the protection used.
For the outdoor section the following 1+1 configuration are presently implemented:
HSB configuration is available with a 1 dB/10 dB asymmetrical coupler and 1 antenna: this
configuration optimizes the infrastructure using only one antenna, a 10 dB coupling has been
chosen to minimize the losses on the normal path (1 dB only).
without coupler and 2 antennas: this configuration adds a natural Space Diversity and improves
the link budget avoiding coupler losses on the standby path.
without coupler and 1 dual polarization antenna: this configuration allows a polarization
diversity, minimizes the antenna and avoids coupler losses on the standby path.
The pole mounting versions are given in the following Tab. 40. for each configuration:
Tab. 40. Pole Mounting versions
Version
see para
1+1 HSB configuration with coupler and full integrated antenna (1338 GHz)
1+1 HSB configuration with coupler and full integrated antenna (78 GHz)
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
113 / 592
The following Fig. 41. and Fig. 42. show the 1+0 configuration with a 30 cm (1FT) antenna in both vertical
and horizontal configurations. The modification of the polarization is obtained by rotating the ODU and the
nose of the antenna.
antenna
WITH EXTERNAL DIPLEXER
N connector
for IDUODU cable
360 mm
(14.17 in)
390 mm
(15.35 in)
N connector
for IDUODU cable
WARNING:
in some ODU mechanical arrangements, the N connector (for IDUODU cable insertion)
can be in the opposite position with respect to that depicted in figure above. In any case,
this N connector is always positioned on the 450 side of ODU assembly.
Fig. 41. View of ODU with full integrated antenna (V polarization)
114 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
antenna
WITH EXTERNAL DIPLEXER
N connector
for IDUODU cable
N connector
for IDUODU cable
in some ODU mechanical arrangements, the N connector (for IDUODU cable insertion)
can be in the opposite position with respect to that depicted in figure above. In any case,
this N connector is always positioned on the 450 side of ODU assembly.
Fig. 42. View of ODU with full integrated antenna (H polarization)
Please refer to the Installation Handbook, for the P/N of full integrated antenna pole mounting, and
for detailed assembly drawings.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
115 / 592
See Fig. 43. below. The 2 ODUs are interconnected through a 1 dB /10 dB coupler. The coupler is
fixed on the 1+0 pole mounting with 4 catches. The 2 ODUs are connected to the coupler with their
catches.
The modification of the polarization is done on the coupler by rotating rings at antenna port and on
the antenna by rotating the nose (the ODUs are always in the same position).
Coupler type
Waveguide
(3 ports)
Coupling loss
13, 15 GHz
10 dB
WR 62
1 dB / 10 dB
10 dB
WR 42
1 dB / 10 dB
28, 38 GHz
10 dB
WR 28
1 dB / 10 dB
antenna
Coupler
360 mm
(14.17 in)
535 mm
(21.83 in)
620 mm
(24.41 in)
COUPLER VIEW
116 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
14.6.2 1+1 HSB configuration with coupler and full integrated antenna (1338 GHz)
14.6.3 1+1 HSB configuration with coupler and full integrated antenna (78 GHz)
Tab. 42. Available couplers (78 GHz)
N.B.
For coupler P/N and assembly drawings of ODUs + coupler, please refer to the Installation
Handbook
Frequency band
Coupler type
Waveguide (3 ports)
Coupling loss
78 GHz
10 dB
WR 112
1 dB / 10 dB
521
235
max 126
(under)
NOSE
ADAPTER
NOT INTEGRATED
ANTENNA
POLE MOUNTING
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
117 / 592
Please note that the use of 600 mm flex twist is not suggested for antennas bigger than 3ft (90 cm
diameter), due to mechanical reasons. The suggested way to make the RF connection is to use the
elliptical wave guide fitted with flanged connectors.
Tab. 43. ODU Output flanges with external antenna
N.B.
Equipment
and Range
(GHz)
ODU Output
Flange
A
UDR84
Suggested
Antenna
Flange
FLEXTWIST
C.E.I.
E.I.A.
R84
WR112
9470 AWY
78
B
PDR84
UBR84
PBR84
or:
UBR84
R84
WR112
PBR84
UBR84
PBR84
9413 AWY
12.7 13.3
UBR120
R120
WR75
PBR120
UBR120
PBR120
9415 AWY
14.2 15.4
UBR140
R140
WR62
PBR140
UBR140
PBR140
UBR220
R220
WR42
PBR220
UBR220
PBR220
UBR320
R320
WR28
PBR320
UBR320
PBR320
9418 AWY
17.7 19.7
9423 AWY
21.2 23.6
9425 AWY
24.5 26.5
9428 AWY
27.3 31.3
9438 AWY
37.0 40.0
N.B.
If the flextwist is not provided by AlcatelLucent, the user must carefully choose the type of
the connection guide in order to limit as much as possible galvanic couples between
antenna/flextwist and flextwist/ODU contact surfaces that can induce rust. For this purpose
please note that the surfaces are:
118 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Concerning the interface between the ODU output flange and the suggested antenna flange, the following
Tab. 43. details for each product the standard wave guide to be used and the suggested flange for the
external antenna.
herebelow
on page 123
For the Light service kit cable, please refer to para.32.10 on page 405.
14.7.1 Operative information on ODUs with embedded or external diplexer
14.7.1.1 General, views and access points
Fig. 46. (for ODUs with embedded diplexer) and Fig. 47. (for ODUs with external diplexer) on pages
120121 show ODU views and access points.
The external interfaces are listed in Tab. 44. below, with the corresponding connector.
Tab. 44. ODU external interfaces
Ref. in
Fig. 46.
and Fig. 47.
Interface
Connector
Further
information
(1)
waveguide
Tab. 45.
herebelow
(2)
(3)
male N 50 ohm
12pin LEMO
(Fig. 48.
on page 122)
para.32.10
on page 405
N.B.
78
1315
1825
2838
WR112
WR62
WR42
WR28
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
119 / 592
TRANSCEIVER
+
BRANCHING
SOLAR SHIELD
(1)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(3)
(A)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(4)
WARNING:
in some ODU mechanical arrangements, the N connector (for IDUODU cable insertion)
can be in the opposite position with respect to that depicted in figure above. In any case,
this N connector is always positioned on the 450 side of ODU assembly.
Fig. 46. Views of ODUs with embedded diplexer
120 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(4)
BRANCHING
(4)
TRANSCEIVER
(B)
SOLAR SHIELD
(A)
(1)
(B)
(A)
(A)
(B)
(3)
(2)
(A)
(B)
(2)
(3)
(4)
WARNING:
in some ODU mechanical arrangements, the N connector (for IDUODU cable insertion)
can be in the opposite position with respect to that depicted in figure above. In any case,
this N connector is always positioned on the 450 side of ODU assembly.
Fig. 47. Views of ODUs with external diplexer
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
121 / 592
12
11
10
3
KEY
122 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This is a conductive ORING and must be left dry. Do not wet it with silicon grease (silicon
grease must be used only on Oring between ODU and antenna).
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER
ORING
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
123 / 592
Fig. 50. below shows the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces:
(B) (HIGH FREQ) and (C) (LOW FREQ) RF interfaces on BRANCHING box
The TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes can be coupled in two alternative ways (1800rotated with
respect to each other):
BRANCHING boxs (B) (HIGH FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER boxs (D) (TX)
in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the HIGH frequency range of the Shifter set by Craft
Terminal (see field D in Fig. 52. on page 126); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the
corresponding LOW frequency range;
BRANCHING boxs (C) (LOW FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER boxs (D) (TX)
in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the LOW frequency range of the Shifter set by Craft
Terminal (see field D in Fig. 52. on page 126); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the
corresponding HIGH frequency range.
(D)
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER
(A)
(B)
(C)
(E)
Fig. 50. ODUs TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces
124 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
N.B.
There is only one possible way to couple the BRANCHING box and the TRANSCEIVER box:
there is a mistakeproofing put by the factory on the TRANSCEIVER box, whose position
depends on the type of transceiver (low or high band, as shown in Fig. 51. below) to ensure that
the association with the BRANCHING box is always the right one. Notice that this feature was
not available at the very beginning of the 7/8 GHz introduction.
mistakeproofing
mistakeproofing
Fig. 51. 78 GHz ODUs BRANCHING box mistakeproofing
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
125 / 592
B
C
154_B
LOW
HIGH
160
LOW
HIGH
7442
7596
7442.5
7602.5
7526
7680
7512.5
7673.5
SYMBOL OR WRITING
A9400
MEANING
Equipment Acronym & Alcatel Logo
ALCATEL
CE
12345 (example)
Notified body
!
126 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
15 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Data indicated in this manual must be considered as typical values
The guaranteed values are only those indicated in the contract.
This chapter describes the technical characteristics of the 9400AWY Rel.2.1 in the following RF band
configurations:
Tab. 46. 9400 AWY family
SYSTEM
BAND (GHz)
9470AWY
78
9413AWY
13
9415AWY
15
9418AWY
18
9423AWY
23
9425AWY
25
9428AWY
28
9438AWY
38
General Characteristics
on page 128, including:
RF channeling
on page 129
Switching system
on page 134
Tributary interfaces
on page 135
Modem
on page 135
on page 135
IDUODU cable
on page 135
Manmachine interface
on page 136
Alarms
on page 136
Power supply
on page 136
Mechanical characteristics
on page 136
Environmental conditions
on page 137
on page 137
on page 138
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
127 / 592
Version
Station type
Terminal
Configuration
Reference standard
(system)
Transmission capacity
RF channel spacing
Tunability
Transmitted power
ATPC range
RTPC range
RF frequency stability
Synthesizer step
250 kHz
RF spectrum masks
Spurious
emissions
System gain
Rx max input level
Switching system
SC #1 DATA CHANNEL
V11 codirectional
V11 contradirectional
NMS channels
128 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Equipment
ETSI standard
Frequency
range
Channeling
(GHz)
Frequency
band
(GHz)
7
9470 AWY
4&16 QAM
9413 AWY 4QAM
9413 AWY16QAM
7.117.9
ITUR F.385
ITUR F.386
7.7259.5
13 GHz
12.7513.25
15 GHz
14.415.35
18 GHz
17.719.7
23 GHz
21.223.6
25 GHz
266
315
728
420, 490, 644
1008, 1010
340, 1560
1092.5
1008, 1050,
1200,1232
1200
24.526.5
ERC 1302
ITUR Rec. 748
1008
28 GHz
27.529.5
ERC 1302
ITUR Rec. 748
1008
38 GHz
3739.5
ERC 1201
ITUR Rec 749
1260
ERC 1202
ITUR Rec 497
MEXICO
ERC 1207
ITUR Rec 636
ERC 1203
ITUR Rec 595
CHINA
ERC 1302 annex A
Standard Tx/Rx
separation
(MHz)
150, 154, 160, 161, 168,
182, 196, 245
119, 126, 151.614, 208,
266, 294.44, 305.56,
311.32
For all frequency bands, the ETSI reference standard is the harmonized standard EN 302 217. In this
stardard , 4QAM is class 2 and 16QAM is class 4.
15.1.2 RF channelling
ETSI RF CHANNELING
Capacity (Mbit/s)
2x2
4x2
8x2
16x2
32x2
3.5
14
28
3.5
14
28
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
129 / 592
Tolerance:
Equipment
Output power
dBm
(Note 1)
25
21
24
20
24
9415 AWY16QAM
20
22
19
19
16
17
14
16
13
16
13
Tx/Rx separation
MHz
130 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ITUR/CEPT Rec.
Channel Bandwidth
[MHz]
Emission
Designator
2,8
3,5
3M5D7W
5,5
7M0D7W
10,9
14
14M0D7W
21,7
28
28M0D7W
2,8
3,5
3M5D7W
5,5
7M0D7W
10,9
14
14M0D7W
21,7
28
28M0D7W
Radio Type
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
131 / 592
Data is split into following Tab. 47. to Tab. 51. according to capacity.
Note for all tables: Transmitted PTX tolerance:
2dB @ ODU Operating temperature range 33C + 55C
Tab. 47. ETSI System Characteristics 32E1 (typical values)
32E1
Frequency
7/8 GHz
External
Diplexer
13 GHz
15 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
TX Output Power
@ Antenna Port
16
21
20
20
19
16
14
13
13
16
81
79
79
78
78
77
76
74
16
80
78
78
77
77
76
75
73
16
102
99
99
97
94
91
89
87
16
101
98
98
96
93
90
88
86
System Characteristics
QAM
7/8 GHz
External
Diplexer
13 GHz
15 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
25
24
24
22
19
17
16
16
16
21
20
20
19
16
14
13
13
88
86
86
85
85
84
83
81
16
84
82
82
81
81
80
79
77
87
85
85
84
84
83
82
80
16
83
81
81
80
80
79
78
76
113
110
110
107
104
101
99
97
16
105
102
102
100
97
94
92
90
112
109
109
106
103
100
98
96
16
104
101
101
99
96
93
91
89
System Characteristics
QAM
TX Output Power
@ Antenna Port
103 BER Threshold
@ Antenna Port
106 BER Threshold
@ Antenna Port
Net System Gain dB @
103 BER Thr
Net System Gain dB @
106 BER Thr
132 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
7/8 GHz
External
Diplexer
13 GHz
15 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
25
24
24
22
19
17
16
16
16
21
20
20
19
16
14
13
13
91
89
89
88
88
87
86
84
16
87
85
85
84
84
83
82
80
90
88
88
87
87
86
85
83
16
86
84
84
83
83
82
81
79
116
113
113
110
107
104
102
100
16
108
105
105
103
100
97
95
93
115
112
112
109
106
103
101
99
16
107
104
104
102
99
96
94
92
System Characteristics
QAM
TX Output Power
@ Antenna Port
103 BER Threshold
@ Antenna Port
106 BER Threshold
@ Antenna Port
Net System Gain dB
@ 103 BER Thr
Net System Gain dB
@ 106 BER Thr
7/8 GHz
External
Diplexer
13 GHz
15 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
25
24
24
22
19
17
16
16
16
21
20
20
19
16
14
13
13
94
92
92
91
91
90
89
87
16
90
88
88
87
87
86
85
83
93
91
91
90
90
89
88
86
16
89
87
87
86
86
85
84
82
119
116
116
113
110
107
105
103
16
111
108
108
106
103
100
98
96
118
115
115
112
109
106
104
102
16
110
107
107
105
102
99
97
95
System Characteristics
QAM
TX Output Power
@ Antenna Port
103 BER Threshold
@ Antenna Port
106 BER Threshold
@ Antenna Port
Net System Gain dB
@ 103 BER Thr
Net System Gain dB
@ 106 BER Thr
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
133 / 592
2E1
Frequency
7/8 GHz
External
Diplexer
13 GHz
15 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
TX Output Power
@Antenna Port
25
24
24
22
19
17
16
16
97
95
95
94
94
93
92
90
96
94
94
93
93
92
91
89
122
119
119
116
113
110
108
106
121
118
118
115
112
109
107
105
System Characteristics
QAM
Rx EPS
ODU switch
(HSB)
Not hitless
Not hitless
Not hitless
Non revertive/Revertive
Non revertive/Revertive
Non revertive/Revertive
[2]
Configuration
Tx EPS
Rx EPS
ODU switch
1+1 FD
YES
YES
NO
1+1 HSB
YES
YES
YES
134 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ITUT G.703
Code
HDB3
Impedance
75 unbal
120 bal
Jitter Generation
ITUT G.823
Jitter Tolerance
ITUT G.823
Jitter Transfer
ITUT G.736
ITUT G.742
15.3 Modem
Modulation
4/16 QAM
Demodulation
Coherent
Equalizer type
19tap FSE
Channel coding
Spectrum shaping
Raised cosine
N (50 ohm)
Depends on:
ETSI (2 to 16xE1)
39.168 Mbit/s
78.336 Mbit/s
n.b.1
n.b.2
for details on cables that can be employed and relevant cable maximum length, refer to the
Installation handbook.
the HDB3 signal contains the main signal, auxiliary signal and IDUODU service channel.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
135 / 592
Visual (LEDs)
Other
15.7 Alarms
Equipment alarms
3 outputs (IDU HW Failure alarm, ODU Main Failure alarm, ODU Spare
Failure alarm)
Housekeeping alarms
6 inputs / 4 outputs
$ 48 to $ 60 Vdc $20%
Polarity
1+0 : v 50W
1+1 : v 100W
1+0 IDU
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
43 x 210 x 443 mm
1.7 x 8.3 x 17.4 in
1U
< 2.5 kg
< 5.5 lb
2U
< 5 kg
< 11 lb
86 x 210 x 443 mm
1+1 IDU
ODU
Antenna
136 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Transport
IDU
Operation
ODU
Safety
EN 60 950
Power supply
EN 300 132
ElectroStatic
discharge
EN 55022 class B
Symmetric protection implemented in ODU & IDU
Lightning protection
collection and is not to be treated as general household waste (only for B2C equipment)
Separate collection and recycling of waste equipment at the time of disposal contribute to avoid possible
negative effects on the environment and on human health.
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
137 / 592
AlcatelLucent Reference documentation for dismantling and recycling detail is the document:
Ecodeclaration
As far as 9400AWY Rel.2 equipment is concerned, reference documentation for dismantling and recycling
detail is the document:
Tab. 52. Reference documentation for dismantling and recycling detail for 9400AWY R.2 equipment
Product
Code
DOC.
TYPE
(N.B.)
AWY/S
8BW036840000
EUZZA
N.B.
Denomination
END OF SECTION
138 / 592
USER MANUAL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PAGE
141
143
189
Chapter 24 Equipment
It deals with the presentation of the N.E. and the structure of the hierarchical tree,
and the types of subracks and boards, that comprise the Network Element.
219
227
Chapter 26 Radio
It deals with the management of the Radio transmission features.
233
247
251
257
267
277
289
TABLE CONTINUES
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
139 / 592
PAGE
SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT
Chapter 213 Software Management
It deals with the management of the functions related to the software
verification/download.
297
301
140 / 592
SECTION CONTENT
Software package of the NE, to be installed in the NE or update the NE (by means of download
function)
The software package used for management allows the dialogue between craft terminal and NE, to
realize all the functions of the NE and EMLULS ).
The software package used for updating the NE must be installed on the PC and then downloaded on
the NE, thus following product evolution.
21.1.2 Software product list and part numbers
Every Software Product is identified by a Technical Code and a Technical Description and is distributed
by a CDROM with the same identifiers, listed on the following table:
Tab. 53. Software products part numbers
REF
[a]
Technical Description
SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
Technical Code
3DB16131ABAA
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
141 / 592
21.2.1 PC characteristics
Refer to para.31.1.1 on page 309
21.2.2 NE MIB Compatibility
NE MIB structure is automatically converted from previous release 2.1.0, using the procedure described
in Chapter 49 on page 495
V2.1.1 NE MIB structure is not backward compatible with those of previous release 2.1.0 (see point
[1]6 )WARNING on page 495
NE MIB structure is not compatible with any releases 1.0.x and 2.0.x
21.2.3 SWP version specific data and Reference Information Models
Make reference to the Product Release Note (see para.57.2.2 on page 571 )
142 / 592
Requirements
on page 144
on page 146
on page 156
on page 172
on page 181
on page 184
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
143 / 592
a)
PC characteristics
The PC used for TCO Suite application and/or employed as Craft Terminal must meet all
specifications pointed out in para.31.1.1 on page 309.
b)
for the local connection between PC and NE RS232 serial ports, one RS232 cable is necessary
(P/N 1AB054120027)
N.B.
In alternative, for the usage of the NEs Finterface with any PC having no RS232
serial port (but obviously with USB ports available) it is possible to employ the USB
TO RS232 ADAPTER , ordering it to AlcatelLucent (P/N 1AF11294AA**).
for the local direct connection between PC and NE Ethernet ports, one crossconnect Ethernet
cable is necessary.
Otherwise the connection can be done by a normal Ethernet cable through a LAN.
For explanatory drawing, see Fig. 59. on page 154.
Typical AlcatelLucent Ethernet cables are:
Tab. 54. Typical AlcatelLucent Ethernet cables
Length
6m
2m
N.B.
c)
Type
P/N
normal
crossconnect
normal
crossconnect
The TCO Suite applications can use the Ethernet interface only.
The Craft Terminal application can use both the Ethernet and the RS232 interfaces.
Craft Terminal
If the Craft Terminal application must be used, the SWP installation must have been already carried
out, as specified in chapter 31 on page 309.
d)
NE state
the SWP (NEspecific components) must be already present in the NEs flash card and its
active version (see point [2] on page 63 to do this check) must be equal to that of the:
SWP CDROM this manual refers to (in case of TCO Suite application run directly from
the CDROM itself)
SWP installed in the Craft Terminal (see point [1] on page 62 to do this check).
Solve different situations, if any, according to instructions given in para.12.6.4 on page 64.
if the NE must be accessed in remote way (by TCO Suite application or by RECT application)
it must have already a valid TCP/IP address, and such address must be known by the Operator.
144 / 592
22.1 Requirements
e)
f)
Operator skills
g)
the Operator shall be familiar with the use of personal computers in WINDOWSNT /
WINDOWS2000 / WINDOWSXP (professional version only) environment, internally to
which the Network Elements application software operates.
the Operator must be familiar with all the functionalities of this equipment.
furthermore, for a number of configuration applications, the operator shall be aware of some
specifications of the International Standard Organization (ISO) and of the standards applied to
the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) (CCITT Recommendations).
Documentation
Besides this manual, all the documentation set this manual belongs to must be available to the
Operator, to retrieve pieces of information not contained in this manual. The documentation set is
described in Appendix G on page 567.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
145 / 592
below
Summary
on page 147
on page 148
PreProvisioning Tool
SetUp Tool
Advanced Settings
Warning about interface customization carried out by the Direct Connection on page 155
on page 154
146 / 592
22.2.2 Summary
After having started up the TCO Suite (para.22.2.3 on page 148), the TCO Suite Main Menu becomes
available (Fig. 55. on page 149) with the following main tools:
PreProvisioning Tool
This is a fulllocal application.
N.B.
physically and logically local, through a crossconnect Ethernet cable for the local direct
connection between PC and NE Ethernet ports
physically local but logically remote, by a normal Ethernet cable through a LAN for the
connection between PC and NE Ethernet ports
physically and logically remote, by a connection between PC Ethernet port and the NE
through the RECT function or the TCP/IP network.
The SetUp Tool and Alarms & Settings applications cannot be used through the
PCNE local connection by RS232 serial F interface
in case of logically remote connection, you must know the NEs TCP/IP address
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
147 / 592
Standard behavior
The Suite autoruns itself (if this feature is enabled on users PC) as soon as CDROM is read by PC.
If autorun does not start, user must run (doubleclick with mouse on) the Start.exe file, available on
CDROM root in order to launch TCO Suite.
Since this TCO Suite works using Java software, it is mandatory to have a Java Runtime Environment
(JRE) installed on the system. Allowed JREs are Sun only, with version number higher or equal than
1.4.2_12. The first operation performed by autorun procedure is the check for JRE.
All HTML pages used for TCO Suite are XHTML 1.1 and CSS 2.0 standards compliant with respect to W3C
(WWW Consortium) specifications.
Minimal screen resolution allowed to use TCO Suite is 1024x768 pixels
If there is no JRE on users PC or if there is a JRE installed on users PC but its version number if lower
than 1.4.2_12, user will be asked to install the Sun Java Runtime Environment version 1.4.2_12 available
on TCO Suite CDROM (Fig. 53. below).
if user denies authorization to install the suitable JRE, TCO Suite wont be executed at all
if user gives authorization to install the suitable JRE, after some minutes the installation message
appears:
148 / 592
After, the default browser (configured as for user preferences) opens the TCO Suite Start.html page
(Fig. 55. below).
Special conditions
For any special condition which may occur during the TCO Suite startup and the countermeasures to
take, refer to the Appendix B TCO suite startup special conditions on page 511
22.2.4 TCO Suite Main Menu functions
Fig. 55. and Fig. 56. on page 149 show the layouts of the TCO Suite Main Page as described from the
internal version of AS.html file, respectively for the CDROM version and the Local version.
N.B.
The TCO Suite Local version must be explicitly created as described in para.22.2.5.5 on page
153
This page shows the main TCO Suite menu with the following functions:
PreProvisioning Tool
SetUp Tool
149 / 592
CDROM TCO Suite will perform a complete 1320CT installation, if needed (if such software is not
available).
If 1320CT is available on users system, the behavior is common between Local and CDROM TCO
Suites:
[1]
[2]
150 / 592
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
151 / 592
This button connects to the installation file for the Java Runtime Environment, version 1.4.2_12. The
behavior of this button depends on browser configuration. The usual behavior is:
Internet Explorer asks the user to Open or Save the file (Fig. 58. below):
Mozilla Firefox automatically saves the file, the first time (or every time, depends on configuration)
asking the user where to place it;
Mozilla browser automatically saves the file, the first time (or every time, depends on configuration)
asking the user where to place it;
In any case, for most browsers the default behavior can be changed but this strictly depends on browser
configuration and user choices.
152 / 592
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
153 / 592
The difference between Direct or Remote connection, asked to user as in Fig. 62. on page 156, is
depicted in Fig. 59. below, and reflects the working mode for JUSM application:
in case of Remote connection the NE is considered as reachable through the network connected
to users PC so no Ethernet configuration is needed and the SetUp Tool or Alarms & Settings
function is executed.
IP NETWORK
Remote
PC Ethernet interface
HUB
Direct
154 / 592
In order to let the user knows more information about adapters details, by clicking the Details toggle
button some supplemental information are shown as in Fig. 61. :
launch the TCO Suite Alarms & Settings defining the Remote connection, then close the TCO
Suite application
or:
Any of these operations resets the interface customization said above, so that the start of the Craft
Terminal using the Finterface becomes again possible.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
155 / 592
below
on page 159
on page 160
on page 161
on page 164
on page 165
on page 166
on page 166
on page 167
by TCO Suite of SWP 2.0.x you can access only 9400AWY NEs with SWP 2.0.x
by TCO Suite of SWP 2.1.x you can access only 9400AWY NEs with SWP 2.1.x
156 / 592
Then (Fig. 63. below), User is asked to provide the Username and Password [same rules as in point 3 )
on page 179]. In case of remote connection, the NEs IP address entered in previous screen (Fig. 62. )
is displayed.
Fig. 64. TCO Suites Alarms & Settings Main Menu screen
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
157 / 592
Tab. 55. Operations allowed in TCO Suite Alarms & Settings screen according to the Login profile
Login profile
Function
Administrator, Craftperson
and Operator
Viewer
YES
read only
Configuration Setting
(para.22.3.3 on page 160)
YES
NO
Configuration Info
(para.22.3.4 on page 161)
YES
YES
YES
YES
Active Alarms
(para.22.3.6 on page 165)
YES
YES
Power Measurement
(para.22.3.7 on page 166)
YES
read only
Licence Info
(para.22.3.8 on page 166)
YES
YES
Modem Speed
(para.22.3.9 on page 167)
YES
read only
NAT Option
(para.22.3.10 on page 168)
YES
NO
User can perform desired operations by clicking on proper label in proposed menu. The behavior of the
Web Server for each of menu entry is detailed in the following subparagraphs.
Logout button gives the user the possibility to clear its authentication parameters and reload the initial page
(Fig. 64. on page 157) for starting a new session.
The links between pages are available by following standard procedures and correct navigation steps.
If the user will follow nonauthorized processes or will try to search for other pages, a 404 error will show
the Page Not Found result. In this case, the user will be allowed to get back to initial login page and he
has to redo the whole login process.
WARNING:
if, during the usage of the TCO Suite Alarms & Settings functions, the connected NE
becomes unavailable (e.g. for network problems, or after having loaded NE data which
modify the NE IP address), the sandglass symbol appears and no operations are longer
possible. In this case, close the TCO Suite Alarms & Settings session, then verify the NE
reachability (e.g. by PING function).
158 / 592
Operations allowed according to the Login profile (refer to para.23.6 on page 214 for details) are:
2.
In the first situation (Fig. 65. below) the user will see his/hers PC internal time and by clicking on apply,
NE will receive UTC time based on PC configuration.
For example: if users PC is configured as located in central Europe (CET or CEST time zones) and it
shows 20060825 11:40:00, by clicking Apply button NE web server will receive 20060825 09:40 due
to Daylight Saving (summer) Time one hour difference with respect to normal time and to one hour time
difference between CET time zone and GMT time zone.
Fig. 65. TCO Suites Alarms & Settings Date & Time Configuration page
The other function allows user to directly send a specific date and time information to NE without bothering
on time zones but simply specifying all the information needed.
In both cases there could be some short delays (few seconds) between applied time shown after the
operation and current time or selected time.
In case of enabled NTP, this page wont allow to modify NE time and date
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
159 / 592
The set configuration process allows the allowed operator for sending to NE the operators desired
configuration.
Fig. 66. TCO Suites Alarms & Settings Configuration Setting page
To carry out this operation, you must browse from your PC a configuration file configuration_name.qcml
previously created (e.g. through the TCO Suite PreProvisioning Tool, N.B.), and then click on Apply
Configuration button.
N.B.
160 / 592
With some browsers (e.g. Mozilla), it is necessary to specify a textreading application (e.g.
WORD PAD) to open and read correctly the file.
Fig. 67. TCO Suites Alarms & Settings Get Report Request
This screen content, shape, graphics and layout all depend on operating system version and language
and on used browser too. The report file is a text file that describes the configuration of the NE. It contains
all the information once added to the quick configuration report or in the current configuration view used
in the former versions. An example of this file content is shown below:
NE CONFIGURATION
TRIBUTARIES CONFIGURATION
E1 Tributary 1: Signal
E1 Tributary 2: Signal
E1 Tributary 3: Signal
E1 Tributary 4: Signal
E1 Tributary 5: Signal
E1 Tributary 6: Signal
E1 Tributary 7: Signal
E1 Tributary 8: Signal
Mode:
Mode:
Mode:
Mode:
Mode:
Mode:
Mode:
Mode:
Unframed
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Framed
Disabled
Disabled
Framed
DATA CONFIGURATION
[Ethernet Port 1]
Status: Disabled
Auto Negotiation: Disabled
Speed Without Autonegotiation: 100 Mbit/s
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
161 / 592
RADIO CONFIGURATION
[Channel 1]
Tx Frequency: 0 kHz
Tx Range: [5000000 , 40000000] kHz
Rx Frequency: 0 kHz
Rx Range: [5000000 , 40000000] kHz
Current Tx Power: 30 dBm
Atpc Status: Disabled
Shifter Settings: Unconfigured
[Input Point 1]
User Label:CPI1
Polarity: Active
[Input Point 2]
User Label:CPI2
Polarity: Active
[Input Point 3]
User Label:CPI3
Polarity: Active
[Input Point 4]
User Label:CPI4
Polarity: Active
[Input Point 5]
User Label:CPI5
Polarity: Active
[Input Point 6]
User Label:CPI6
Polarity: Active
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
[Output Point 1]
User Label:CPO1
Polarity: Active Closed
Switching Criteria: Manual
External State: Off
[Output Point 2]
User Label:CPO2
Polarity: Active Closed
Switching Criteria: Manual
External State: Off
[Output Point 3]
User Label:CPO3
Polarity: Active Closed
Switching Criteria: Manual
External State: Off
[Output Point 4]
User Label:CPO4
Polarity: Active Closed
Switching Criteria: Manual
External State: Off
NETWORK INFORMATION
[Ospf Area 1]
IP Address: 0.0.0.0
162 / 592
NTP CONFIGURATION
Status: Enabled
Main Server IP Address: 100.5.4.75
Spare Server IP Address: 100.5.5.5
INSTALLED SOFTWARE
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
163 / 592
Just like the Get Configuration Info function, the Get Configuration File allows the user to download the
full NE system report. Instead of being in humanreadable text format, the configuration file is described
in QCML format and it can be used by Quick Configuration by Text File or by PreProvisioning and SetUp
Tools. Selecting (by click) this function from main menu will show the user a Save File screen
(Fig. 68. below) that gives the user the capability to browse its system in order to select the path where
to save the full report file.
N.B.
Fig. 68. TCO Suites Alarms & Settings Get Configuration Request
This file is an XML standardbased set of configuration information that PreProvisioning and SetUp Tool
can preview in a humanreadable HTML layout and allow the user to modify such configuration using a
set of wizard/simplified steps just like the Quick Configuration by Text File do.
164 / 592
Fig. 69. TCO Suites Alarms & Settings Active Alarms: Static Page
This table can be presented into two ways: the first one shown when user chooses Active Alarms function
is a simple page that will show to user alarms active at the moment of its selection.
To give user a better control on this status table, a Refresh button is provided. This button will redo the
request to NE and updates shown HTML page anytime is pressed.
The Enable Automatic Refresh button allows the user to forget about doing a refresh by providing an
automatic refresh process (Fig. 70. below).
Fig. 70. TCO Suites Alarms & Settings Active Alarms: Automatic Page
This page will do a periodic automatic refresh of its content and anyway allows the user to get back to the
manual refresh page.
WARNING:
For autorefreshed pages, a longer timeout is foreseen. This is set to 90 refresh cycles
of 10 seconds each, for a total of 15 minutes. After this timeout, the connection expiration
page is shown.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
165 / 592
This page (Fig. 71. below) allows user to read power measurement result.
Refresh Interval filed allow the operator to set the time duration of the measurement for automatic
refreshing. The choice is among 5,10,30 sec. Otherwise operator can click refresh button directly to
refresh the result of power measurement.
Fig. 72. TCO Suites Alarms & Settings Reading Software License
166 / 592
Fig. 73. TCO Suites Alarms & Settings Changing FInterface Speed
In case of login by viewer profile, the button and combobox elements are not shown and the page just
displays the current modem speed.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
167 / 592
NAT router
In the following the scenario, when the NAT router is used in the network, is analyzed, providing a
list of warnings and the relevant countermeasures. The scenario is represented by a remote
manager that wants to access the radio network; in between one or more NAT router could be
present. WTD suggests not using this device because of the consequences that are hereunder
described.
[2]
168 / 592
[3]
About 1 ) , SNMP is one such application with address content in payload. NAT routers would not
translate IP addresses within SNMP payloads. It is not uncommon for an SNMP specific ALG to
reside on a NAT router to perform SNMP MIB translations proprietary to the private network, but for
sure it is expensive and NAT device depending.
[4]
2)
3)
No registration
NE Reset
NOK
OK
Loopback commands
NOK
OK
Shifter management
NOK
OK
Software Download
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
169 / 592
the F interface (RS232 serial interface) is used for the connection with the PC configured as Craft
Terminal. This connection can be:
local (ECT function, as explained in para.12.4.1 on page 54), through the suitable RS232 cable
supplied with the equipment
physically remote but logically local (ECT function, as above) through an ECTequipment
connection via the public switched telephone network, as explained in Appendix E on page 553
N.B.
as shown in Fig. 59. on page 154, the Ethernet interface can be used for the:
the F interface usage requires LLMAN installation [see choice b ) on page 311]
local connection, through a crossconnect Ethernet cable, or through a HUB), to the PC:
connection to the TCP/IP network (provided that the NE has a valid TCP/IP address).
Notice that by means of this connection, the NE can be reached by:
the PC running the TCO Suite directly from the SWP CDROM
from remote Craft Terminals (RECT function, explained in para.12.4.2 on page 54)
or from the TMN OS or from the PC running the TCO Suite directly from the SWP
CDROM, when the NEs Ethernet interface is not connected (but the NE is defined
in the Supervision Network)
the local Craft Terminal, connected to the F interface or the local Ethernet interface, can
reach other NEs by means of the RECT function
Ethernet Interface
F Interface
Radio Interface
Fig. 76. MAIN Unit front side: interfaces for equipment control
N.B.
170 / 592
N.B.
If the IP Address configured for the Alcatel Virtual Card has been changed after the 1320CT
Platform installation, it is necessary to perform a recustomization by entering the following
command:
If the connection through Ethernet Network Port has been activated, to activate again the
connection through the Serial Port enter the following command:
Configure the Network Card on the CT as explained in the 1320CT Basic Craft Terminal
Operators Handbook.
2)
Enter the NE and enable the Ethernet port on the NE (refer to para. 23.2.3 on page 195).
3)
4)
Activate the CT Connection through the Ethernet Port by the following command:
If the IP Address configured on the Ethernet port has been changed, it is necessary to perform
a recustomization by entering the following commands:
Start Programs Alcatel CTK v3.x.x Customization
Start Programs Alcatel SNMPCTKADDON v3.x.x NE ConnectionEthernet Port
Start Programs Alcatel SNMPCTKADDON v3.x.x SNMP AddOn Customization
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
171 / 592
NE management states
NE Login
NE Logoff or switch off
Closing the 1320CT application
below
on page 173
on page 180
on page 180
172 / 592
Summary
To access and login a 9400AWY NE from you PC for the use of the Craft Terminal functionalities:
b)
physically and logically local, through the RS232 serial cable for its connection to the
equipment F interface
physically remote but logically local through an ECTequipment connection via the public
switched telephone network, as explained in Appendix E on page 553
physically and logically local, through a crossconnect Ethernet cable for the local direct
connection between PC and NE Ethernet ports
physically local but logically remote, by a normal Ethernet cable through a LAN for the
connection between PC and NE Ethernet ports
physically and logically remote, by a connection between PC Ethernet port and the NE
through the RECT function or the TCP/IP network.
in case of logically remote connection, you must know the NEs TCP/IP address
This operation has to be done whenever you have to access the NE locally; it is highly
recommended when commissioning and maintenance tasks must be carried out.
For other operations, consider that any NE reachable through the TCP/IP network
[see point 3 ) below] can be accessed by the PC connected to the TCP/IP network
[see point 2 ) below]
Following cautions stated in point e ) on page 36, through the suitable cable connect the ECT
to the F interface or to the Ethernet interface of the MAIN unit (refer to Fig. 76. on page 170).
To activate on the CT the connection through the Serial Port or through the Ethernet Port refer
to para. 22.4.2 on page 171.
2)
3)
Just from NE management point of view, this operation has to be done whenever:
or, even though you have local access to a NE, other NEs (you want to access
in remote way) are not accessible from the local NE.
Please take into account that this connection must not be done until the network
routing data of the NE have been correctly defined. This definition is carried out
during the Configuration Procedure described in chapter 32 on page 329.
If, in the following, you want to access the NE through the TCP/IP network (provided that it has
already inserted correctly inside it from both physical and logical points of view), you must know
the NEs TCP/IP address.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
173 / 592
Power on the PC and wait for its startup (if not yet done)
d)
e)
1)
in case no NE is locally connected to the PC, these modes are equivalent (no CTNE
connection setup)
Preferred mode to start the CT to login a NE: click the button Operational & Maintenance
of the TCO Suite Main Menu (see Fig. 55. and Fig. 56. on page 149). Refer to para.22.2.4.4
on page 150 for possible additional details.
Notice that this choice in independent from the setting (at PC side) of the CTNE local
connection on the Serial or Ethernet interface (explained in para.22.4.2 on page 171). This is
the reason for preferring this simpler modality to start the CT to login a NE.
if LLMAN (Alcatel Lower Layers Manager) is available on users system, user is asked to
select between serial or Ethernet port connection by following screen:
Yes
Fig. 77. Choice of Serial or Ethernet interface for PCNE physical connection
in case of serial connection (YES answer), no other request is asked to user and
1320CT platform is automatically started with the related Serial port connection
customization;
in case of Ethernet connection (NO answer), no other request is asked to user and
1320CT platform is automatically started with the related Ethernet port connection
customization;
if LLMAN is not available on users system, the 1320CT will be run with the Ethernet
connection customization and the user will be asked the same Direct/Remote request
shown in Fig. 62. on page 156.
After a while, the Network Element Synthesis screen opens [step f ) on page 175].
2)
N.B.
Only in case of Finterface employment, for a correct operation, and only on some PCs
with Windows 2000 or XP, it is necessary to start the Lower Layers Manager (Start
Programs Alcatel Lower Layers Lower Layers Manager) before starting the ECT
Platform (Alcatel 1320CT).
174 / 592
c)
f)
the symbol
symbol is not present if the connection has been established through the Ethernet
interface.
the symbol ? means they NE is not supervised.
Now:
if you have to operate on the NE locally connected, proceed to step h ) on page 177.
the PC is not locally connected to any NE; the screen (the first time you have launched 1320CT
after its installation) is as follows (empty map):
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
175 / 592
SNMP NE creation
N.B.
This is a simplified description. For complete instructions, please refer to the 1320CT
Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook, section EML CONSTRUCTION.
you must know the NEs TCP/IP addresses. Note: the NE has always two addresses that can
be equal or different:
and you must be sure that the NE is reachable from your PC. To make this check, open the
Windows Command Prompt application and execute the command:
ping <space> t <space> TCP/IP_address
Leave this command run some minutes, verifying the connection is and remains established
without interruptions, then close the command window.
Note: in case the Local Configuration and Ethernet Configuration addresses are different
from each other, perform this check for both.
then, proceed as shown in Fig. 80. below, inserting in (2) the NEs own TCP/IP address.
Note: in case the Local Configuration and Ethernet Configuration addresses are different
from each other, you must insert the Local Configuration address.
N.B.
During the creation of the SNMP NE, if not set automatically, insert the number 161
in the TCP/IP Port field.
(2)
(1)
(3)
Fig. 80. SNMP NE creation in the Network Element Synthesis map
After such creation, the empty map of previous Fig. 79. becomes populated as in Fig. 81. below
(the symbol ? means the NE is not supervised).
At the end, save the map (Map Save). In this way, when you start again 1320CT, you will find
the same NEs you have created in this phase.
If you need to start supervision and, after, to login any NE present in the map, proceed to next
step h )
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
USER MANUAL
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
176 / 592
g)
h)
select the interested Network Element clicking once left mouse button on it;
2)
while NE selected, with right mouse button choose Start Supervision and with left mouse
button execute it, clicking once (Fig. 82. below). In alternative, while NE selected, with left
mouse button choose Supervision Start
If you want to change the User Label of the NE (select it Description ), take into
account that it must not include the following characters:
\ ? : * < >|.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
177 / 592
Wait for the automatic restarting of the Supervision (at the end of the fading conditions).
The icon in NE will become whole and the bullet will take the color relevant to the alarms (if any)
active in the NE.
If the Supervision does not start, close and open again the CT.
If the Supervision does not start, switch off and switch on the PC.
WARNING:
When the supervision of a NE has been started dont click on the name of the map.
This operation causes the lock of the CT and the CT must be closed and opened again.
178 / 592
WARNING: Due to a deep fading, the radio remote NE can be unreachable. In this condition in the
USM will appear the following message:
i)
select the interested Network Element (NE) clicking once right mouse button on it;
2)
while NE selected, with right mouse button choose Show Equipment and with left mouse
button execute it, clicking once (Fig. 84. below). In alternative, while NE selected, with left
mouse button choose Supervision Show Equipment
after a while, the Login screen appears (Fig. 85. below), that must be filled in with suitable
values.
UserName= initial
Password = initialing
Otherwise, use the Login information the Administrator has assigned you.
WARNING:
The change of the password of this Administrator user is strongly suggested, to be done
at the end of all commissioning phases. Further this initial user, the Administrator is
allowed to create/delete users belonging to the predefined profiles.
For the Administrator to make such operations, please refer to para. 23.6 on page 214.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
179 / 592
and, after a while, the 9400AWY Main view opens (Fig. 87. on page 181)
After the 9400AWY Main view has opened, all the available menus are introduced in para.22.6 on
page 181.
22.5.3 NE Logoff or switch off
Before disconnecting the F interface cable or before switching off the NE:
then, in the Network Element Synthesis Window (Fig. 86. below), stop the NE supervision as follows:
holding it selected, select Stop supervision with mouse right button. In alternative, while NE
selected, with left mouse button choose Supervision Stop
Verify that all NEs in the Network Element Synthesis map are in not supervised state
Now you can close the Network Element Synthesis Window (Fig. 86. below) clicking
180 / 592
View title
View area
see para.22.6.2 on page 182
Menu bar
see para.22.7.1 on page 184
Message/state area.
N.B.
For the meaning of the icons in the Severity alarm synthesis, Domain alarm synthesis and the
Management state control panel refer to Alarm synthesis indication para.45.8.2.1 on page
437.
The Menu bar , Main Tool bar and the View area contained in the same NE view permit to perform all
configuration and supervision operations and the display of the specific selected item.
The view organization is detailed in the 1320CT Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook to which refer
for the description.
Main tool bar
View title
Menu bar
Tab panel
View
area
RESOURCE
TREE AREA
RESOURCE LIST AREA
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
181 / 592
The View Area manages all domains from which the user can start. It is organized into tabbed panel, e.g.
many windows placed one upon another. Each window is selectable (placing it on top of the others) with
a tab shown on the top.
Each panel represents a set of functions. The area consist of the following sets:
Equipment
External Points
Line Interface
Performance
Radio
Loopback
Each tab panel is labeled with the set name ( e.g. Equipment, Line Interface, etc ).
Each tabpanel (e.g. functionalities area) consists of four areas:
ResourceTree Area: displays all the available resources of the Radio NE.
ResourceList Area: may be represented by: Tabular View (e.g., Line Interface Domain) or
Graphical View (e.g., Equipment Domain).
Tabular View: displays a tabular representation of the selected resource. As default, no tabular
element is shown.
182 / 592
Apply
this button activates the modify, but it does not close the window.
Cancel
this button closes the window without modifying the parameters displayed in the window.
OK
Close
Help
this button provides the help management for the functions of the supporting window.
Critical configuration choices generate a warning message for user confirmation before to be activated.
22.6.4 Main tool bar
Besides navigation buttons, it contains some shortcut icons for specific tools or views (most of them are
accessible also through the Menu Bar).
next
screen
not operative
Quick Configuration
Fig. 88. Main tool bar
N.B.
previous screen and next screen buttons are enabled according to the context.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
183 / 592
Menu organization
below
on page 185
on page 186
on page 186
on page 187
on page 187
Permanent Menus
Views
(first column).
Configuration
(second column).
To set the general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters
(performance monitoring, OverHead parameters).
Diagnosis
(third column).
Supervision
(fourth column).
SW Download
(fifth column).
Help
(last column).
Other Menus
Equipment
This menu is present only when the Equipment menu (selected in the View menu or in the
Equipment tab panel) is active. It allows to go back to the supporting equipment of the displayed
object.
184 / 592
Previous:
Open Object:
Not active.
Open in New
Window:
Not active.
Duplicate View in
New Window:
Not active.
Equipment:
External Points:
Line Interface:
Opens the Line Interface view to configure all the tributary ports.
See Chapter 25 on page 227
Performance:
Radio:
Loopback:
N.B.
It is possible to enter directly menus Equipment, External Points, Line Interface, Performance,
Radio, Protection Scheme, Loopback by clicking on the relevant tab panel above the view area.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
185 / 592
This menu allows to set the general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters, by
means of the following entries:
NE Time:
Network configuration:
Alarm Severities:
System setting:
Allows the system configuration, providing the setting of all the parameters
for the NE setup.
See para. 23.4 on page 210
Quick configuration:
Profiles management:
Log Switch:
Alarms:
Log Browsing:
Abnormal
condition list:
Summary Block
Diagram View:
Current configuration
View:
Displays the current configuration of the NE.
See para. 211.6 on page 288
186 / 592
Access State:
Restart NE:
MIB Management: Allows to perform backup and restore operations of the MIB.
See para. 28.3 on page 253
SW key:
Server Access
Configuration:
Manages the configuration of the FTP server to be used for the software
download to the NE.
See para. 213.1 on page 297
SW status:
Shows and manages the status of the software packages installed in the NE
memory banks.
See para. 213.3 on page 299
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
187 / 592
188 / 592
23 CONFIGURATION
This chapter describes the following Configuration menus:
NE Time
on page 190
Network Configuration
on page 191
Local Configuration
NTP Configuration
Ethernet Configuration
IP Configuration
on page 192
on page 193
on page 195
on page 196
Routing information
on page 204
Alarm Severities
on page 205
System Settings
on page 210
NE Configuration
Link Identifier
Overhead
on page 210
on page 212
on page 213
Quick Configuration
on page 213
Profiles management
on page 214
Functional description
Change Password procedure
Users Management procedure
Log Switch
on page 196
on page 200
on page 202
on page 214
on page 216
on page 217
on page 218
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
189 / 592
The NE local time can be displayed and/or realigned to the OS time basis.
From the Configuration pull down menu, select the NE Time option.
The following dialogue box opens, from which you can set the local NE time.
190 / 592
23.1 NE Time
NTP Configuration:
Ethernet Configuration:
IP Configuration
which comprises:
IP static routing configuration: defines the Host/Network destination address for IP static
routing
OSPF Area configuration:
IP Address configuration of
PointToPoint Interfaces :
Routing information
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
191 / 592
N.B.
This function is equivalent to that of Quick Configuration Procedures Step G on page 361
WARNING:
read carefully Rules for the definition of the NEs Local IP and Ethernet IP
addresses on page 361
192 / 592
This function is equivalent to that of Quick Configuration Procedures Step G on page 361
By selecting NTP Configuration the dialogbox in Fig. 92. opens, which allows to enable the Network
Time Protocol.
It is mandatory to define both the Main Server address and the Spare Server address.
In case a Spare Server is not available, fill its address field with the
same value of the Main Server.
To configure the setting click on Apply.
The Refresh pushbutton causes the refresh of the screen.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
193 / 592
When the NTP is enabled, one of the NE must be MASTER and all the other NEs must be SLAVEs.
An example is shown in Fig. 93.
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
194 / 592
This function is equivalent to that of Quick Configuration Procedures Step G on page 361
WARNING:
read carefully Rules for the definition of the NEs Local IP and Ethernet IP
addresses on page 361
Enable which comprises two selections to Enable or Disable the Ethernet interface.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
195 / 592
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Network Configuration and then from the
cascading menu, the IP Configuration option ( see Fig. 95. on page 196).
This function is equivalent to that of Quick Configuration Procedures Step I on page 364
The dialogbox opens ( see Fig. 96. on page 197 ) and allows to configure the parameters for IP Static
Routing Configuration.
The following fields and data are present:
[1]
IP Address:
[2]
IP Mask:
[3]
[4]
Interface type:
Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and
close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
New button is used to insert a new page.
Delete button is used to delete the selected page.
Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.
196 / 592
23.2.4 IP Configuration
Point to Point Interface Index for the NMS channels (NMSRF, NMSV11, NMSG703)
WARNING:
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
197 / 592
If in the screen of Fig. 97. above the Default Gateway IP Address check box has been selected, write
in the Default Gateway IP Address field below the relevant IP address.
If in screen in Fig. 97. above has been selected the Point To Point Interface Index check box, the screen
in Fig. 98. on page 199 opens.
N.B.
It is also possible to define a Default Gateway Routing (refer to para.23.2.4.2 on page 199 for
details).
198 / 592
select Network
b)
c)
d)
e)
click OK
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
199 / 592
N.B.
This function is equivalent to that of Quick Configuration Procedures Step F on page 360
The dialogbox opens ( see Fig. 99. on page 200 ) and allows to configure the parameters for OSPF
(Open Shortest Path First) Area Table Configuration.
The following fields and data are present:
Id
OSPF Area IP Address
OSPF Area Stub
The fields give a synthetical information that includes all the addresses (specific to a NE and to a Network)
in an Area.
The Id identifier is used when configuring the PPP interface or the ETH/OS OSPF parameter.
Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table
and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
New button is used to insert a new page.
Delete button is used to delete the selected page.
Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.
WARNING:
When the area is a Stub area, all interfaces inside the same Stub Area (NMS and
Ethernet) must be defined Stub.
200 / 592
In the screen write the IP address, the IP mask and select the flag (True/False).
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
201 / 592
N.B.
This function is equivalent to that of Quick Configuration Procedures Step I , point [4] on
page 364
The dialogbox opens ( see Fig. 101. below) and allows to Enable or Disable the three NMS channels,
which use the PPP protocol.
202 / 592
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
203 / 592
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Network Configuration and then from the
cascading menu, the Routing information option.
The dialogbox in Fig. 103. on page 204 opens.
This screen is a readonly screen and displays the routing parameters currently active on the NE.
The pushbutton Refresh allows to refresh the information shown in the screen.
The Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.
204 / 592
Profile Primary Alarms. This profile enables the emission of the primary alarms. General rules
used to define the alarms severity:
MINOR or WARNING (according to the impact of the alarm): the alarm doesnt affects the
service (with the exception of HighBER alarm, which MINOR alarm severity is defined, even if
it is service affecting).
Profile No Remote Alarms. This profile enables the emission of the primary alarms plus EW and
LBER alarm. This profile uses the following rules to define the alarms severity:
MINOR: the alarm is potentially service affecting but a protection has recovered the service;
WARNING: the alarm cannot affect the service (independently from any protection).
Profile All Alarms. This profile enables the emission of all the alarms (included AIS and RDI). This
profile uses the same severity of the Primary alarm profile, the only difference is that EW, LBER,
AIS and RDI alarms are emitted.
The rules used to define the alarm severity are the same of the Primary alarm profile.
N.B.
In case of alarms affecting a protection different severities are used for SA and NSA. The same
severity is used both for SA and NSA in case of service independent alarms.
N.B.
The rules used to define the profile alarms severity described above, are not applied to the
housekeeping alarms. In this case, in order to enhance the flexibility, a different severity is
assigned to each alarm profile (WAR, MIN and MAJ).
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
205 / 592
N.B.
An Alarm Profile is the complete set of the equipment alarms with their severity in case of Service
Affecting situation and No Service Affecting situation.
Each alarm has its Service Affecting and No Service Affecting attribute, which can differ according to the
Alarm Severity Profile.
N.B.
To some objects in the equipment (overhead alarm, input housekeeping alarm, tributaries etc.)
can be assigned an Alarm Profile.
To do this association:
select the tab panel (Equipment, Line Interface, FSO etc.) in which is present the object
to be associated to a specific Alarm Severity Profile;
206 / 592
Select in the screen of Fig. 104. on page 206 the Alarm Profile to be cloned.
Digit the name to be assigned to the new Alarm Profile and click on Apply.
Select again the Alarm Severity option from the Configuration menu.
Select the just created Alarm Profile (Link 1 in the example of Fig. 106. on page 207).
207 / 592
To modify the severity of an alarm click on the Service Affecting field click on the suitable alarm and
select a new severity (see Fig. 107. on page 208).
208 / 592
To modify the severity of an alarm click on the No Service Affecting field click on the suitable alarm
and select a new severity (see Fig. 108. on page 209).
To save the changes in the Alarm Severity Profile click on Apply. (By clicking on Cancel you quit the
Alarm Severity Profile screen without any change) (see Fig. 108. on page 209).
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
209 / 592
NE configuration
Link Identifier
Overhead
WARNING:
At the first configuration (i.e. with a flash card with an empty MIB) at the end of the
configuration the Restart NE must be performed (refer to para. 28.2 on page 252).
WARNING:
Should during this procedure to be selected a wrong type (i.e. PSU4860 instead of
PSU2460), to insert the correct type enter the System Settings menu NE configuration
tab panel; select the correct type; click on Apply and then restart the EC by entering menu
Supervision and by activating command Restart NE.
23.4.1 NE Configuration
The user can view and define the NE configuration by selecting the NE Parameters tabbed panel.
The window displayed in Fig. 109. below will appear.
The fields of this screen are practically equal to those of Quick Configuration Procedures Step A
screen described on page 347. Please refer to it for details not given in this paragraph.
210 / 592
The information related to the modulation type is shown in the Modulation field. The possible values are
4QAM or 16QAM. The operator choice will be applied by clicking the related Apply button.
The Capacity can be modified by selecting a different type according to Tab. 64. on page 348 and then
selecting the Apply button to send the new value.
The Tributary Port Configuration area is in the lower part of the window. The Impedance field allows
the operator to configure the impedance of the E1 tributary (unbalanced 75 ohm or balanced 120 ohm).
The impedance value will be applied by clicking on the related Apply button.
N.B.
After a change in the Type or Capacity or Modulation field the explicit confirmation shown
in Fig. 110. is requested.
N.B.
After a change in the Type or Capacity or Modulation field (for the Modulation only for
the remote NE configuration) at the completion of the operation the CT forces the JUSM closing
with the following warning message:
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
211 / 592
The user can view and define the Link Identifier by selecting the Link Identifier tabbed panel.
The window displayed in Fig. 112. below will appear.
The fields of this screen are practically equal to those of Quick Configuration Procedures Step D
screen described on page 358. Please refer to it for details.
If changed, the new parameter values will be sent to NE by clicking on the related Apply button.
212 / 592
23.4.3 Overhead
The Overhead tabbed panel (Fig. 113. below) is present only if the Audio/User Service Channels
plugin is configured and identifies the parameters for the management of the phone number (EOW
function) and auxiliary channel interface:
The fields Order Wire Configuration and Type in the Auxiliary Interface Configuration area
of this screen are practically equal to those of Quick Configuration Procedures Step J screen
described on page 366. Please refer to it for details.
If changed, the new parameter values will be sent to NE by clicking on the related Apply button.
The field Alarm Profile allows to associate to the Overhead alarms a particular Alarm Profile: a
default alarm profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 23.3.1
on page 207). To associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the
selection among the available Alarm Profiles.
N.B.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
213 / 592
Password length: the length must not be less than six (6) characters under any circumstances
and must not be less than eight (8) characters for administrator user profile. Moreover the
password length must not be more than 20 characters.
Password composition: the password must be composed of full ASCII characters set
(UPPER/lower case, numeric and special characters).
The CT provides User login procedures (with the Show Equipment action) with the username
displayed on the screen and the cleartext password not displayed on the screen. After 3 number
of consecutive unsuccessful NE login attempts, the CT interface closes the login procedure. To
access to the NE, a new Show Equipment action must be performed.
Each user is associated to a predefined profile.
[2]
User number
Twentyfive (25) users at most can be created.
[3]
214 / 592
All user predefined profiles can be connected to NE by a F interface (local serial interface) or by a
remote interface.
[4]
NE scratch behavior
At installation time (NE scratch), a default Administrator user is created with (lower case):
UserName= initial
Password = initialing
The change of the password of this Administrator user is strongly suggested.
Further this initial user, the Administrator is allowed to create/delete users belonging to the
predefined profiles. The manager is prohibited from creating a user with username that already
exists.
The Administrator is allowed also to change user passwords (own or of all user by administrator).
[5]
Reset NE behavior
All the security information sets (username/password/profile for each user) are stored on NE
database (MIB data base). After the NE reset, these information sets are not lost and are recreated
as before the NE reset.
Complete online information is available in the Users Management help screen of Fig. 117. on page
217.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
215 / 592
This procedure is available for all Operator Profiles, after the login (see para.22.5.2 on page 173)
1)
Following screen appears; fill it with old and new passwords, taking into account password
characteristics listed in point [1] on page 214. New password will be active at next login (after
having logged out).
1
2
3
4
216 / 592
Configuration Profiles Management Users Management (see Fig. 114. on page 216)
2)
Following screen appears. Click inside to explore matters and carry out the desired action.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
217 / 592
This screen (Fig. 118. below) of the configuration menu sets the inhibition or allowing of the the event and
alarm store in the Event Log and Alarm Log (for their browsing, refer to para.211.2 on page 279 ).
The Lock setting corresponds to the store inhibition state.
218 / 592
24 EQUIPMENT
This chapter describes the types of functions offered to the user for Equipment Management.
The equipment domain deals with the management of the NE as a whole and its physical components
(subrack, boards,..)
The main screen of the Equipment tab panel differs according to the configuration:
In the Resource List Area is shown a graphical representation of the Equipment, which consists of one
IDU and one ODU in 1+0 configuration and two IDUs and two ODUs in 1+1 configuration.
The IDU consists of different boards according to the configuration: 16xE1 with or without the Ethernet
ports, or 32xE1.
A colored ball gives information on the status of the associated object (Equipment, ODU, IDU, IDU board).
The color differs according to the severity of the alarms:
Green: no alarm
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
219 / 592
ODU
ODU Status
IDU Status
IDU
ODU
Ch#0
ODU
Ch#1
ODU
Status
IDU/EXT Ch #1
IDU/MAIN Ch #0
IDU Status
220 / 592
Equipment Status
IDU Status
IDU
MAIN BOARD
Status
The IDU channel#1 includes the IDU/Main Ch#1 object, which includes according to the configuration type
the following options:
IDU/MAIN/16xE1 Ch#1 with the second group of 16xE1 tributaries to implement the 32xE1
configuration
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
221 / 592
The screen in Fig. 122. below will appear for the Ch#1 and the screen in Fig. 123. below will appear for
the Ch#0.
IDU Status
IDU
MAIN BOARD
Status
Fig. 122. 1+1 IDU/MAIN Ch#1 view
IDU Status
IDU
EXTENSION BOARD
Status
Fig. 123. 1+1 IDU Ch#0 view
Two IDUs are present:
The IDU channel#1 includes the IDU/Main Ch#1 object which includes according to the configuration type
the following options:
IDU/MAIN/DATA Ch#1 with the 4 Ethernet ports (this board receives the power supply from the Main
IDU only).
IDU/MAIN/16xE1 Ch#1 with the second group of 16xE1 tributaries to implement the 32xE1
configuration
The IDU channel#0 includes the IDU/Ext Ch#0 object which includes according to the configuration type
the following options:
IDU/EXT/16xE1 Ch#0 with the second group of 16xE1 tributaries to implement the 32xE1
configuration
222 / 592
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
223 / 592
24.3.1 Alarms
The Alarms tab panel provides the fault management, which checks the current state of alarms related
to the selected object (Fig. 125. below).
Severity: the severity associated to the alarm and assigned in the Alarm Profile
224 / 592
24.3.2 Configuration
The User Label field (Fig. 126. below) only display the label associated to the selected node in the tree.
The field Alarm Profile allows to associate to the object alarms a particular Alarm Profile: a default alarm
profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 23.3.1 on page 207). To
associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection among the available
Alarm Profiles.
N.B.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
225 / 592
226 / 592
25 LINE INTERFACE
This chapter describes the type of functions available for Line Interface Management.
The Line Interface domain deals with the management of the aggregate frame and tributary ports (line
side).
The Line Interface menu allows the user to manage the resources of the line interfaces: PDH tributary,
NMS channel and Ethernet port, if has been configured.
This domain view consists of the following areas (Fig. 128. below):
Resource Tree Area: displays the tributary ports sorted by the channel number and the NMS
interfaces.
Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in the tree area.
Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the selected object s properties in list
area. This area performs the available functions for involved resource.
Port Number: the port for a given channel and type of port
In the Resource Tree Area below the Tributary PDH line are shown all the E1 tributaries
according to the capacity selected in the System Setting menu (see para.23.4.1 on page 210)
or in Quick Configuration Procedures Step A screen (described on page 347 ).
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
227 / 592
25.1.1 Alarm
The fault management checks the current state of alarms related to the selected tributary.
It is provided by the alarm panel like the one explained in para. 24.3.1 on page 224.
WARNING:
The GFP alarm (alarm present in the Ethernet data interface) if active is shown not in this
tab panel, but in the Alarm tab panel of the Radio menu.
25.1.2 Configuration
There are different tab panels according to the type of interface:
228 / 592
Signal Mode
Line RAI Insertion
Radio RAI Insertion
Alarm Profile
Signal Mode
The possible values are:
Disabled
The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the
Apply button to send the new value to NE.
WARNING:
[2]
In case of configuration with two Ethernet ports, some E1 ports must be disabled in
order to allow the transmission of the Ethernet data.
Refer to Tab. 65. on page 350 and to the relevant explanations in the same page.
The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the
Apply button to send the new value to NE.
[3]
The current state can be modified selecting a different signal mode value and then click on the
Apply button to send the new value to NE.
[4]
Alarm Profile
The field Alarm Profile allows to associate to the tributary alarms a particular Alarm Profile: a default
alarm profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 23.3.1 on page
207). To associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection
among the available Alarm Profile.
N.B.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
229 / 592
230 / 592
For whole information on Ethernet port characteristics and management, refer to the Appendix
D on page 547
The Data Tributaries Configuration tab panels described in following points [1] and [2] are available only
if the Enhanced Ethernet plugin is installed and has been defined by choice 16E1GData in the
Configuration % System Settings screen of Fig. 109. on page 210
[1]
Fig. 131. Line Interface View: Data Tributary Port QoS Configuration tab panel
Fig. 132. below shows Performance Monitoring counters of all Data Tributary Ports
231 / 592
Fig. 133. Line Interface View: individual Data Tributary Port Configuration tab panel
a)
Except the field Alarm Profile and the button Restart , information related to a data port
Configuration panel is practically equal to that described in Quick Configuration Procedures Step
B point [2] Ethernet GPort configuration screen described on page 351 . Please refer to it for
details not given here.
b)
The field Alarm Profile allows to associate a particular Alarm Profile to the interface alarms: a default
alarm profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator in menu Configuration > Alarm
Severities. To associate a different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection
among the available Alarm Profile.
c)
232 / 592
[2]
26 RADIO
The Radio domain view allows the user to manage the resources of the radio transmission channel.
A Radio NE consists of one or two radio channels with a set of functional blocks (tributary ports, radio ports
etc).
This domain view consists of the following areas (Fig. 134. on page 233):
Resource Tree Area: displays the radio ports sorted by channel number.
Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in tree area.
Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the object s properties selected in the
list area. This area enables to execute the available functions for involved resource.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
233 / 592
The fault management allows to check the current state of alarms related to the selected object.
It is provided by the alarm panel like that shown in para. 24.3.1 on page 224.
26.2 Configuration
The window shown in Fig. 135. below controls some functions for a Radio channel.
To define the involved port, first select the port/channel in the tabular view: this selection enables the
Resource Detail list to show the available functions for the single resource.
The Tx Remote Mute automatically works (on and then off) only if performed on the
local NE (i.e. the NE to which the CT is connected). When a remote Tx mute is executed,
the EC changes the channel in monodirectional way, in order to have the possibility to
send the command to remove the mute. If the Network Element has been restarted after
a MUTE, there is no more possibility to setup the channel, because the remote address
is not known, and, in any case, to setup the channel a bidirectional communication is
needed. The only way to remove the MUTE command is with local CT or from a remote
CT which can reach the Network Element through another supervisory interface.
234 / 592
26.1 Alarms
26.3 Frequency
The Frequency menu allows to read and, if necessary, to set the frequency parameters.
The system can operate with different types of ODU according to the RF band and to the channel
arrangement. There are ODUs which can manage only one shifter (fixed shifter) or several predefined
shifters (flexible shifter). For details, according to ODU type employed, please refer to para.14.5 from
page 104 onwards.
Fig. 136. Radio Frequency Functions with Shifter and Rx Freq enabled
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
235 / 592
Since frequency setting could impact on traffic and requires a lot of time, following
messages are shown in sequence:
236 / 592
[1]
[2]
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
237 / 592
This menu (Fig. 140. below) allows to read and, if necessary, to set the Tx power parameters.
The shown information is related to the channel selected in the Resource Tabular View.
When you change the modulation scheme (from 4 QAM to 16 QAM or viceversa) the Tx
power (in case of operation with RTPC) and the ATPC range (in case of operation with
ATPC) of the new modulation scheme must be in the correct range. If the value is out of
range the relevant field in the RTPC & ATPC screen appears empty (automatically is
associated a default value, but this value is not displayed).
Fill the field with the suitable value.
238 / 592
26.4.1 ATPC
The ATPC can be Enabled or Disabled.
The new value will be applied when the Apply button is pressed. If the ATPC has been enabled, the
ATPC Range and ATPC Rx Threshold fields must be filled.
WARNING:
[1]
In 1+1 Configuration (HSB or FD) the ATPC information, sent back from the Rx side to Tx
side, is the information relevant to the channel (protecting or protected) currently active
in the EPS protection scheme. The two transmitters are, therefore, driven by the same
ATPC control signal.
ATPC Range
The Min Value and Max Value, for Tx Range in the ATPC management, are shown in the Atpc
Range area. The min and max levels can be changed by writing the new values in the fields.
WARNING:
Obviously, you must set Max TX Power value > Min TX Power value.
If you want to set the minimum value of the range greater than the current maximum
value, you must at first change the maximum value, then change the minimum value
(obviously setting it smaller than maximum).
When the Apply button is pressed the new values will be applied.
[2]
ATPC Rx Threshold
The value of the power low threshold can be changed by writing the new value in the field.
When the Apply button is pressed the new values will be applied.
WARNING:
During the reconfiguration phase or during the activation of a new software, the alarm
ATPC loop could be (but not necessarily is) active.
WARNING:
It is recommended to use the following Tab. 56. in order to set the ATPC threshold.
The ATPC shape is calculated using the max capacity.
4
QAM
16
QAM
TH
7/8 GHz
13 GHz
15 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
Min
Value
73
74
74
72
72
71
71
70
Max Value
60
60
60
60
55
50
50
50
Min
Value
69
70
70
68
68
67
67
66
Max Value
60
60
60
60
55
50
50
50
Max Value
PRxth + 8 dB
60 dBm
23 GHz
PRxth + 8 dB
55 dBm
25 & 38 GHz
PRxth + 8 dB
50 dBm
106
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
239 / 592
[1]
Nominal Power
The Nominal Value field in the RTPC area is a readonly field and shows the nominal value of the
transmitted power (expressed in dBm).
[2]
Tx Power
The Tx Power field in the RTPC area shows the current value of Tx power (expressed in dBm), when
the ATPC is disabled. In this case, it is possible to modify this value ERROR FREE in ATPC Range
(Pnom 20 dB) with 2 dB max step allowed, by writing the new value and by pressing the related
Apply button
N.B.
During the command setting the CT is frozen. Waiting time: < 15.
The new value must be within the allowed transmitted power range. This range is shown in the Power
Value label of RTPC area.
If the ATPC is enabled, the Tx power value cannot be modified.
240 / 592
26.4.2 RTPC
BER
The file name must not include the following characters: \ ? : * < > |.
The log file contains the sample value and records the measurement up to a maximum dimension ( 7 days
for a 2 s sample time).
By clicking on the Start button the screen Power Measurement Graphic appears (see Fig. 141. on
page 241).
The Power Measurement Graphic is available only if the CT is connected to the NE.
The screen in Fig. 142. shows the Tx and Rx measurements related to the local NE.
Through this screen the operator can see, in real time, the power transmitted by the local and remote
transmitter (Tx) and the power received by the local and remote receiver (Rx).
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
241 / 592
The top of the screen offers all the characteristics present in the current measurement:
Radio port: gives the symbolic name associated to the radio channel being analyzed;
Sample time: indicates the frequency used to send the measurement requests to NE;
Start time: is the first request time;
Stop time: is the interval time selected in the previous parameters window, added to the start time;
Time: is the current response time;
Log File: is the complete pathname of the file where the received values are stored.
Tx Local End
max TX local value and date when this value was received for the first time.
min. TX local value and its current date when this value was received for the first time.
current TX local value and its current date.
242 / 592
The top graphic screen area shows the TX curves (local and remote), while the bottom area shows the
Rx curves (local and remote). Note that the colors represent the linked endpoint of the two NE; for
example, if the local TX is blue, the remote receiver will also have the same color.
Tx Far End
Rx Local End
max Rx local value and date when this value was received for the first time.
min. Rx local value and its current date when this value was received for the first time.
current Rx local value and its current date.
Rx Far End
N.B.
max TX remote value and date when this value was received for the first time.
min. TX remote value and its current date when this value was received for the first time.
current TX remote value and its current date.
max Rx remote value and date when this value was received for the first time.
min. Rx remote value and its current date when this value was received for the first time.
current Rx remote value and its current date.
PTx and PRx levels software readings tolerance is:
PTx = Real Value 2dB @ ODU Operating temperature range 33C + 55C on 020dB
RTPC range
PRx = Real Value with 3 dB accuracy from 41 dBm down to 69 dBm included (nominal
received levels)
PRx = Real Value with 4 dB accuracy from 30 dBm down to 40 dBm included and from
70 dBm down to threshold included
If in the Tx end field the indication in dBm is +99, the Transmitter is off (or in HSB Configuration the
transmitter is in standby).
If in the Tx end field the indication in dBm is +99 and, at the same time, in the relevant Rx end field
the information in dBm is 99, probably the supervision has been lost. The confirmation of the loss
of the supervision is given by a broken red icon in Network Element Synthesis screen.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
243 / 592
Click on Read File field and press on the Select File button. The directory of the CT automatically opens
to navigate and get the power measurement file.
N.B.
as default, the measurement files are stored in the ALCATEL/CTKv3.x.x directory and have
extension .txt.
244 / 592
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
245 / 592
This paragraph describes the nonintrusive BER function, by means of which it is possible to start/stop
and read the BER measure (Fig. 147. below).
[2]
elapsed time
suspect measurement indication. The measurement is marked as suspect if the NE was not
able to collect all the violations in the observation period (card missing, card fail).
[3]
= 4.6E07 (32E1)
= 9.2E07 (16E1)
= 1.8E06 (8E1)
= 3.7E06 (4E1)
= 7.4E06 (2E1)
T (elapsed time) is the difference between the start time and the stop time of the
measurement.
246 / 592
27 EXTERNAL POINTS
This chapter describes the types of functions offered to the user for External Points Management (please
refer to para.13.6.1 on page 85 for physical implementation).
There are two types of external points: input and output external points.
By clicking on the tree root, displayed in Fig. 148. below, the tree will be expanded according to the
equipment configuration.
A single left click selection of a tree element causes the activation of the corresponding Tabular
representation displayed in the Resource list area. A click on a row in the Resource list area opens the
Configuration menu in the Resource Detail Area. An example of this mechanism is displayed in the
Fig. 148. below.
The lower part provides the possible parameters, which can be modified; after a row selection, the user
can modify the User Label, the Polarity and can associate a different Alarm Profile by clicking on the
Selection button.
The operator choices will be sent to NE after selecting the Apply button.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
247 / 592
Polarity: describes the polarity (Active Closed/ Active Opened). In this field the polarity of the external
point can be changed.
Criteria: Manual or Automatic. The output can be activated manually by the CT by selecting Manual
(Fig. 149. below) or automatically by selecting Automatic (Fig. 150. on page 249). In this case a
new field appears (Event) in which it is possible to select the alarm, the generation of which will cause
the activation of the external point output.
External State: describes the state (on /off). In this field the external point can be activated (on) or
deactivated (off).
Fig. 149. Output External Points: CP01 ... CP04 (Manual activation)
248 / 592
Fig. 150. Output External Points: CP01 ... CP04 (Automatic activation)
The last three external points (FAIL IDU, FAIL ODU Ch.#1, FAIL ODU Ch.#0) (Fig. 151. on page 250)
are described by the following parameters:
Polarity: describes the polarity (Active Closed/ Active Opened). In this field the polarity of the external
point can be changed.
N.B.
These three output external points are automatically activated when the relevant equipment
summarizing alarm is active.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
249 / 592
Fig. 151. Output External Points View: FAIL IDU, FAIL ODU
250 / 592
28 SUPERVISION
Performance processing,
switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state
28.1.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state
Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the Requested option from the Access State
cascading menu as shown in the following figure.
Fig. 152. Configuration of the Craft access state from the Equipment NE view in the OS mode
From the confirmation dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the Craft access operation
using the Yes or No pushbutton. The request is sent up to the OS which accepts or refuses it.
If the OS doesnt answer in a predefined time, it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state
and can be managed by a Craft Terminal.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
251 / 592
Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then from the Access State cascading menu select the OS
option.
From the confirmation dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the OS access operation.
The NE is now managed by the OS.
N.B.
The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates whether the NE is
managed by a craft terminal or by the OS.
N.B.
Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the
NE. When the communication with the NE is lost, the OS automatically recovers the
communication and forces the state existing before the loss of communication (therefore, Craft
Terminal access can be denied or granted).
28.2 Restart NE
The RESTART operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions.
From the Supervision cascading menu, select the Restart NE option.
After the activation of the Restart NE Command (or after the pressing of the HW reset
pushbutton) the LLM icon is frozen and the supervision of the local NE and the remote
NE is lost.
252 / 592
28.1.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state
Interface configuration
NMS configuration
Ethernet configuration
IP configuration
1.
Local configuration
2.
3.
4.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
253 / 592
This menu (Fig. 156. below) allows to save on the CT the NE configuration. To backup the configuration
write the filename in the Backup field (Lower part) and press Confirm Backup.
WARNING: The backup file name must not include the following characters: space, &, /.
254 / 592
28.3.1 Backup
28.3.2 Restore
This menu (Fig. 157. below) allows to download to the NE a previously created backup.
28.3.3 Activate
This command (Fig. 158. below) allows to activate the configuration just downloaded with the restore.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
255 / 592
This menu allows to remove from the list of the backups one particular backup.
To remove a backup select the backup file in the upper part and press Confirm Remove.
Confirm the operation to start the operation.
By pressing Refresh the list of backups in the upper part of the screen is updated.
28.4 SW key
From the Supervision cascading menu, select the SW key option.
In this screen the type of the key (stored in the flash card installed in the Main IDU unit) is shown.
256 / 592
29 PROTECTION SCHEMES
This domain is present in 1+1 configuration only.
This domain view consists of the following areas (Fig. 160. below):
Resource Tree Area: displays the radio ports sorted by channel number.
Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in tree area.
Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the properties done in list area. This area
enable to perform the available functions for involved resource.
By clicking on the tree root displayed in Fig. 160. below, the tree will be expanded according to protection
schemes supported.
To see the current position of the switches enter the menu Diagnosis > Summary Block Diagram View
(refer to para. 211.5 on page 285):
Mux/Demux Protection corresponds to the Switch Tx and the Rx output switch in Fig. 195. on page
287
the Radio protection corresponds to the Switch RPS HS in Fig. 195. on page 287
the HSB protection is implemented in the ODU: one Transmitter is connected to the antenna (active),
the other transmitter is in standby. Refer to Fig. 195. on page 287 . The HSB protection is available
only if the HSB configuration has been selected.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
257 / 592
The Equipment Protection Management is performed by selecting Mux/Demux Protection tree element.
The following window (Fig. 161. below) allows a complete view of all NE resource involved in the EPS
protection:
Schema Parameters
Channels Parameters
To read the correct indication on the switch status press here to refresh the screen
Protection Type: this parameter is defined at creation time and it is read only. The supported type
is: 1+1, e.g. a working channel (Main) is protected by a protecting channel (Spare).
Operation type: it defines if automatic restoration from protecting to protected channel is allowed
(revertive mode) or inhibited (not revertive mode).
In Revertive Operation, after an abnormal condition such fading, hardware problem or maintenance
action, the relevant protection will automatically switch back to channel #1 as a default state.
The operator choice for Operation Type will be applied by clicking on Apply button.
258 / 592
29.1.2 Commands
To enter the Commands menu, click, in the Tree view (Fig. 162. below), on the Spare #0 element or on
the Main #1 element
Priority
Lockout
Forced
Automatic switch
Manual
Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces in service Channel 1 (default channel)
for both EPS and RPS and disables the hitless function, independently of the possible active alarms.
This command activates signaling ABN.
WARNING:
the EPS Lockout command is not error free, even if it is raised when traffic is not on
the spare channel.
Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces in
service Channel 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling
ABN.
Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the
commands generated by the logic.
Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an
automatic switch. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If
this command is active, it will be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate
signaling ABN.
Note :
The Forced command for channel 1 is equivalent to the Lockout command for the channel
0. In both case, the result is that the relevant channel protection path is forced to standby status.
N.B.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
259 / 592
The Radio Protection Management is performed by selecting the Radio Protection element tree.
The following window (Fig. 163. below) allows a complete view of all NE resource involved in a RPS
protection:
Schema Parameters
Channels Parameters
To read the correct indication on the switch status press here to refresh the screen
Protection Type field: defines the protection schema architecture: 1+1 Hitless;
Operation Type field: the possible values are revertive (automatic restoration allowed) or
notRevertive (automatic restoration Inhibited).
In Revertive Operation, after an abnormal condition such fading, hardware problem or maintenance
action, the relevant protection will automatically switch back to channel #1 as a default state.
260 / 592
29.2.2 Commands
To enter the Commands menu, click, in the Tree view (Fig. 164. below), on the Spare #0 element or on
the Main #1 element
Priority
Lockout
Forced
Automatic switch
Manual
Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces in service Channel 1 (default channel),
independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling ABN.
Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces in
service Channel 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling
ABN.
Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the
commands generated by the logic.
Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an
automatic switch. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If
this command is active, it will be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate
signaling ABN.
Note :
The Forced command for channel 1 is equivalent to the Lockout command for the channel
0. In both case, the result is that the relevant channel protection path is forced to standby status.
N.B.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
261 / 592
The Transmission Protection Management is performed selecting Transmission Protection element tree.
The following windows (Fig. 165. below) allows a complete view of all NE resource involved in a TPS
protection:
Schema Parameters
Channels Parameters
To read the correct indication on the switch status press here to refresh the screen
Protection Type: this parameter is defined at creation time and it is read only. The supported type
are: 1+1 (onePlusOne) ,e.g. a working element is protected by one protecting unit.
Operation type: it defines if automatic restoration from protecting to protected unit is allowed
(revertive mode) or inhibited (not revertive mode).
In Revertive Operation, after an abnormal condition such fading, hardware problem or maintenance
action, the relevant protection will automatically switch back to channel #1 as a default state.
The operator choice for Operation Type will be applied clicking on Apply button.
262 / 592
29.3.2 Commands
To enter the Commands menu, click, in the Tree view (Fig. 166. below), on the Spare #0 element or on
the Main #1 element
Priority
Lockout
Forced
Automatic switch
Manual
Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation connects to the antenna Transmitter 1
(default transmitter), independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling
ABN.
Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command connects
to the antenna Transmitter 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates
signaling ABN.
Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the
commands generated by the logic.
Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an
automatic switch. It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If
this command is active, it will be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate
signaling ABN.
Note :
The Forced command for channel 1 is equivalent to the Lockout command for the channel
0. In both case, the result is that the relevant channel protection path is forced to standby status.
N.B.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
263 / 592
Automatic
Manual
These two modes are alternative.
To activate the Automatic mode click on the Align pushbutton (the compensation procedure is
automatically done).
To activate the Manual mode:
[1]
[2]
[3]
N.B.
Write in one field the suitable value (in range 031) and in the other field write 0.
At the end of automatic procedure, a warning message will be displayed to explain the result of procedure.
For example, if procedure failed the following message is shown:
264 / 592
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
265 / 592
266 / 592
210 LOOPBACKS
The functions described in this section allow to perform the test operations by loopbacks.
2 near end and 1 far end loopbacks are embedded in the IDU
Some loopbacks are declared local only; this means that, when the NE receives a loopback request, the
NE executes the request only if it is arriving from the local ECT. This restriction has been introduced to
avoid the risk of a permanent disconnection from the NMS of a remote NE.
210.1.1 IDU loopbacks
[1]
Near end
ODU
Far end
ODU
Far end
IDU
RF
16E1/E3
LIU
FRAME
MODEM
IF RF
IF RF
MODEM
FRAME
16E1/E3
LIU
Near end
ODU
Far end
ODU
Far end
IDU
RF
16E1/E3
LIU
FRAME
MODEM
IF RF
IF RF
Station A
MODEM
FRAME
LIU
16E1/E3
Station B
Fig. 171. Far end IDU tributary loopback
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
267 / 592
Nearend
ODU
Far end
ODU
Far end
IDU
RF
16E1/E3
LIU
FRAME
MODEM
IF RF
IF RF
MODEM
Station A
FRAME
LIU
16E1/E3
Station B
Fig. 172. Near end tributary loopback
Near end
ODU
Far end
ODU
Far end
IDU
RF
16E1/E3
LIU
FRAME
MODEM
IF RF
IF RF
MODEM
FRAME
LIU
16E1/E3
Nearend
ODU
Far end
ODU
Far end
IDU
RF
16E1/E3
LIU
FRAME
MODEM
IF RF
IF RF
MODEM
FRAME
LIU
16E1/E3
268 / 592
[3]
N.B.
N.B.
The DATA block in Fig. 175. is present with the Ethernet port option only.
CT
IDU
IDU
ODU
ODU
DATA
DATA
MUX/
DEMUX
MODEM
RF
RF
MODEM
MUX/
DEMUX
TRIB
TRIB
No.
Loopback
name
CT selection in
the Resource
Tree Area
Location
E1
Port#xx
Tributaries
Near End
E1
Port#xx
Tributaries
Near End
Internal
E1
Port#xx
Tributaries
Far End
Internal
IDU cable
Channel 1
Near End
External line
ODU
cable
Channel 1
Near End
External line
RF
Channel 1
Near End
External line
RF local loopback.
(N.B.)
WARNING:
Loopback
type
Note
loopbacks on disabled tributaries are not applied (even if no messages are displayed when
the command is sent)
N.B.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
269 / 592
Tributaries
(External Line)
IDU
CABLE
ODU
CABLE
Radio port
(RF loopback)
2 Channel
(External Line)
If any indication does not correspond to the expected one, press Refresh to actualize the view.
270 / 592
In Fig. 176. below is given the association of all the possible loopbacks in 1+0 configurations and their
positions in the block diagram of the equipment provided by the Summary Block Diagram View option,
available in the Diagnosis menu.
In Fig. 177. below is given the association of all the possible loopbacks in 1+1 configurations and their
positions in the block diagram of the equipment provided by the Summary Block Diagram View option,
available in the Diagnosis menu.
4 IDU
5 ODU
CABLE
CABLE
Radio port
6 (RF loopback)
Tributaries
(External Line)
Channel
(External Line)
If any indication does not correspond to the expected one, press Refresh to actualize the view.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
271 / 592
Resource Tree Area: displays the object on which the loopbacks can be performed, sorted by
number.
Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the loopback supported by the resource
selected in tree area.
Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the properties done in list area. This area
enables to perform the available functions for involved resource.
In this area the following information is given:
Channel: the number of the channel (channel 1 only)
Type Interface: the type of interface in which a loopback can be performed.
Location: the station in which the loopback is performed (Near End/Far End)
Type: the type of the loopback (Internal/Internal IF/External Line)
Modality: the type of the loopback (Loop and Continue only)
Activation: the activation status of a loopback (Active/Not Active)
Clicking on tree root displayed in Fig. 178. below, the tree will be expanded according to NE configuration.
272 / 592
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
273 / 592
274 / 592
N.B.
loopbacks on disabled tributaries are not applied (even if no messages are displayed when
the command is sent)
For the loopbacks relevant to Ch. 0 and Ch.1 all the switches must be forced/lockout to the
related Channel; for the Tributaries loopbacks must only be forced to the radio switch to Channel
0 or lockout to Channel 1.
To activate a loopback:
[1]
Select the suitable loopback to be activated by clicking on the relevant object in the Resource Tree
Area or by selecting the relevant row in the Resource List Area.
[2]
The screen in Fig. 182. below will appear. (In this screen has been selected the loopback on tributary
E1, Near End).
[4]
Click on Apply.
[5]
The Loopback is now ACTIVE (in the row in the Resource List Area the Activation field of the relevant
loopback will change from Not Active to Active).
WARNING:
when the Loopback commands start, the Craft Terminal is not frozen. Before to set
another command, it is recommended to wait 120 to 160 seconds minimum.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
275 / 592
Select the suitable loopback to be removed by clicking on the relevant object in the Resource Tree
Area or by selecting the relevant row in the Resource List Area.
[2]
The screen in Fig. 183. below will appear. (In this screen has been selected the loopback on tributary
E1, Near End).
[4]
Click on Apply.
[5]
The Loopback is now DEACTIVATED (in the row in the Resource List Area the Activation field of the
relevant loopback will change from Active to Not Active).
WARNING:
When the Loopback commands start the Craft Terminal is not frozen. Before to set
another command is recommended to wait 10 to 25 seconds.
276 / 592
211 DIAGNOSIS
This chapter describes the Diagnosis menus:
Alarms
on page 278
Log Browsing
on page 279
Remote Inventory
on page 282
on page 284
on page 285
on page 288
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
277 / 592
This item menu allows navigation to the external tool: Alarm Surveillance.
The Alarm Surveillance application is dedicated to receive, store, display and manage, in real time, the
alarms raised by different sources (current alarms). This facilitates the overall alarm surveillance and
improves the reaction time of the network operators in case of anomalies in the network. It also provides
the possibility to archive and retrieve the alarms (historical alarms), allowing postanalysis of anomalies
in the network.
Taking into account the number of alarms that are usually emitted in a network, the Alarm Surveillance
offers the operator a systematic approach for the alarm visualization.
211.1.1 Counter Summary
This is a main window (Fig. 184. below) used to display statistics on alarms. It shows alarm counters,
according to severity levels or statuses of the alarms (critical, major, minor, warning, indeterminate,
cleared, acknowledged, incoming). In the counter summary, alarms may be grouped according to filtering
criteria in several sublists. For each sublist, each of the counters may be shown or not.
278 / 592
211.1 Alarms
The list of alarms displayed by AS (both current and historical) is not easy to read and
understand, mainly due to the way in which units and functional entities are indicated in the
Friendly Name.
select the Alarm Log option to access the Alarm Log file (N.B.)
The Alarm Log windows opens, permitting to analyze all the alarms stored in the NE.
See para.211.2.1 on page 280
select the Event Log option to access the Event Log file (N.B.)
The Event Log windows opens, permitting to analyze all the events stored in the NE.
See para.211.2.1 on page 280
select the Software Trace Log option: see para.211.2.2 on page 281
N.B.
The event and alarm store in the Event Log and Alarm Log can be inhibited or allowed by the
Log Switch function (see para.23.7 on page 218 )
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
279 / 592
By selection of Alarm Log or Event Log item, the specific Event Log Browsing Application will be
started. This application is integrated function of JEMLUSM Core.
This tool collects and shows the alarm log items (Fig. 187. below) and the event log items
(Fig. 188. below). Selecting Set Filter menu item of main menu bar, it is possible to define a filter that
can be applied to search of item.
280 / 592
The use of the Software Trace Log option is reserved to the AlcatelLucent technicians.
Selecting the Software Trace Log custom item of menu displayed in the Fig. 186. on page 279 , the
application will try to download the trace log file from NE, showing a temporary information box:
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
281 / 592
211.3.1 General
The Remote Inventory feature allows to store and retrieve the information useful to identify the
components of the product. It is also used to identify the actual equipment type and then, eventually, to
provide an equipment mismatch alarm, if the equipment type read from remote inventory data is different
from the equipment expected provided by the managers.
The AlcatelLucent factory labelling with an electronic inventory data of each replaceable hardware unit
is provided according to the AlcatelLucent standard format:
Tab. 61. Remote Inventory AlcatelLucent standard format
Information field name
Location
Length (Byte)
Encoding
Format identifier
ASCII 22
Company identifier
12
ASCII
36
ASCII
CLEI code
711
10
ASCII
1218
14
ASCII
Software/Firmware PN + ICS
1925
14
ASCII
Factory identifier
2627
ASCII
Serial Number
2835
16
ASCII
Date Identifier
36
ASCII 00
Date
3739
ASCII
Customer field
4062
46
ASCII
Checksum
63
Bin
Format identifier field gives information about the structure and length of the inventory data block.
The chosen identifier format is 22 (this field is not visualized to the operator).
The checksum is not visualized to the operator.
The Remote Inventory data is provided for the following equipment components:
Tab. 62. Remote Inventory mnemonic field
UNIT TYPE
MNEMONIC
M486032
E486032
P4DATASW
P16E1DS1
PACSC
ODU unit
ODU32E
282 / 592
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
283 / 592
The Abnormal Condition List option in the Diagnosis menu displays all the abnormal conditions (i.e.
the manual operations) currently active in the NE.
The abnormal conditions can be:
284 / 592
Some examples are shown in Fig. 193. to Fig. 196. on pages 286 to 287
In detail, it is possible to:
navigate from Loopback indicator to specific Loopback view; for example, by clicking on (L)
indicator of main board (Ch#1) the operator can navigate to loopback view for PDH tributaries;
navigate from Performance indicator to specific Performance view; for example, by clicking on
(P) indicator (line side) the operator can navigate to Current Data view;
navigate from ODU box to the radio view with automatic selection of the related channel.
By pressing the Refresh button the refresh of the screen takes place (active loopback and performance
and position of the switch).
N.B.
N.B.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
285 / 592
Fig. 193. Summary Block Diagram View example: 1+0 16E1 without Ethernet ports
Fig. 194. Summary Block Diagram View example: 1+1 HSB 16E1 with Ethernet ports
286 / 592
Fig. 195. Summary Block Diagram View example: 1+1 HSB 16E1ETH with Audio/User Service
Channel PlugIn (Lockout)
Fig. 196. Summary Block Diagram View example: 1+1 FD 32E1 with Audio/User Service Channel
PlugIn
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
287 / 592
This screen is a readonly screen, which shows the current configuration of the NE.
Clicking on the Current Configuration view icon of the Main tool bar (see Fig. 88. on page 183) or
selecting Current Configuration view from the Diagnosis menu, the following readonly screen is
opened:
288 / 592
Radio Hop Section: the section between two radio stations inside the protection section
Radio Link Section: the section identifying the protected section.
PROPR.
FRAMING
FEC
ENCODE
MODEM
RF
MODEM
RF
FEC
DECODE
PROPR.
FRAMING
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
289 / 592
The performance view allows the user to activate and monitor the PM process on the selected object.
This domain view consists of the following areas (Fig. 199. below):
Resource Tree Area: displays the threshold for measurement and the object monitoring sorted by
channel number.
Resource List Area: displays the PM management for the selected resource in the tree area.
N.B.
15 minutes
24 hours
The 15 min Performance Monitoring data are stored in the History Data report only if errors
have been occurred.
The 24 h Performance Monitoring data are always stored in the History Data report.
Considering one section (see Fig. 198. on page 289), one current register is for 15 min report and one for
24 h report; 96 history data can be stored for 15 min report and 8 history data for 24 h report.
The counters supported are the following:
N.B.
Errored Seconds
Severely Errored Seconds (N.B.)
Background Block Error
Unavailable Seconds
According to ITUT G.826 a second is declared Severely Errored Second if it is a second period
with more than 30 % of errored blocks or at least one defect.
The following description explains the functions to provide the PM process with a granularity period of 15
min. The same functions are provided for 24h PM process.
The PM are of HOP or LINK type. The current report can be seen (and configured) and the history PM log
can be seen.
290 / 592
With reference to Fig. 200. below, to see (and configure) the current report:
[1]
click on HOP channel (0 or 1) (in 1+0 configuration channel 1 only) to see the HOP report or click
on LINK to see the LINK report
[2]
[3]
click on HOP channel (0 or 1) (in 1+0 configuration channel 1 only) to see the HOP report or click
on LINK to see the LINK report
[2]
[3]
To each PM can be associated a threshold table. To associate a threshold table click on HOP or LINK in
the Resource Tree Area in Fig. 200.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
291 / 592
The window displayed in Fig. 201. below allows to start and to read the 15min PM report and 24h PM
report.
212.3.1 CD parameters
The fields displayed in the upper part of Fig. 201. on page 292 allow the operator to check and manage
the parameter of the current data collection.
Suspect interval shows whether the current data are suspect or not.
Elapsed Time field (readonly) displays the elapsed time in the current interval of monitoring.
End Period: display time of the PM in the graphical description and in the tabular description in
the upper part of the screen. By pressing the Refresh button this time changes.
Max Interval supp.: max. number of intervals (reports) which can be suppressed in the History
because they dont have errors.
Num. Interval supp.: number of intervals (reports) suppressed in the History because they dont
have errors.
N.B.
An interval is defined as suspect if at least one of the following conditions occurs in the
collection period:
the elapsed time deviates more than 10 seconds of the nominal time
loss of the PM data in the equipment
performance counters have been reset during the interval.
292 / 592
212.3.2 CD Counters
The fields and buttons displayed in the lower part of Fig. 201. on page 292 (Counters Area) allow the
management of performance events.
In the left part of Counters Area, there is a graphical description of the event counter value:
N.B.
In the right part of Fig. 201. on page 292, there are button choice to perform action on the current data
collection:
Start button starts the counters for the data collection, when the CD has been stopped.
Stop button stops the counters for the data collection, when the CD has been started.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
293 / 592
The PM process monitors the parameters during a specified interval (i.e. 15min) and stores their values
in history data. A History Data collection is created automatically at the end of each time interval of Current
Data and deleted when the relative CD is deleted.
212.4.1 HD Parameters
The table displayed on the following window (Fig. 202. below) collects the history data for a related PM
report.
Suspect interval: this field describes whether the History Data is suspect or not.
Counters: the last columns hold the counters value (BBE, ES, SES, UAS).
294 / 592
For the association of the threshold tables to the PM refer to para. 212.5.3 Threshold table
association.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
295 / 592
296 / 592
213 SW DOWNLOAD
The complete procedure to download the SWP to the NE is described in Chapter 48 SWP
download toward NE on page 485.
N.B.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
297 / 592
Through this menu software is downloaded to the NE in order to upgrade the NE software version.
To start download select the desired software version and click on the Init download button.
N.B.
This screen displays the software packages previously stored through the menu Supervision
> Files Administration > Software Administration available in the NES menu.
The Forced check box can be used to force download (i.e. the complete description file is downloaded
to the NE).
If the Forced download is not selected, the system shall first proceed to compare the software to be
downloaded with the software present in the NE. Then only the differences are downloaded.
When the SW download starts a screen, showing the in progress operation of the download, appears.
Download is aborted when the Abort button is pressed.
WARNING:
The download time from the CT to the NE flash is 2530 min. approx.
At 50% of this time starts the download to the first ODU, which lasts 1520 min. approx.
At the end of this time interval starts the download of the second ODU, if present, which
lasts 1520 min.
298 / 592
213.3 SW Status
This menu allows to display the information of the software installed in the NE.
The following information is displayed:
Current status: committed or standby. The committed status refers to the software currently in use.
By clicking on the Software Units Status button the screen of Fig. 207. below opens, giving additional
information on the software package.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
299 / 592
OC_R: software on the ODU Controller (Radio) (The total download time of the ODU software is 17
to 20 min approx. with some SES after 15 seconds from the activation) (Note 1)
Note 1:
during the download of the ODU and FPGA software arises the alarm Firmware Download On
Going. This alarm disappears when the download is over. The download lasts 2 minutes for
every FPGA starting from the activation of the alarm.
The second bank will appear when a new software package has been downloaded the first time.
During download, necessary to update the software version, the download file is automatically stored in
the standby bank.
To activate the new version first check the operational status of the standby bank. If the status is enabled
(this means that download took place without errors) select Activation or Forced Activation in the
Software Management Action field and click on the Apply Action button.
By selecting Forced Activation the bank to be activated is forced to restart.
By selecting Activation the bank to be activated restarts only if the content of the two banks differ.
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
USER MANUAL
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
300 / 592
214.1 Introduction
This function allows the backup and/or restore of the MIB and is carried out at two levels:
the first is available at NE loggedin level, and allows operations depicted in Fig. 209. below:
NE XXX Flash Card
MIB
MIB
MIB BackUp
MIB Restore
ECT
MIB delete
ECT
the second is available at Network Element Synthesis level (independently of whether or not the
NE is logged in), and allows operations shown in Fig. 210. below (it depicts save/load using
floppydisk, but the operation can be done through any available read/write computer resource):
Save to
disk
Load from
disk
ECT
ECT
Fig. 210. Allowed MIB management tasks at Network Element Synthesis level
From operative point of view, this management and whole applicative examples are described in the
following paragraphs.
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
301 / 592
This example depicts the Save to disk by using the floppydisk, but the operation can be done
through any available read/write computer resource.
1)
in field Look in (1) the PC directory where MIBs are stored is shown
302 / 592
3
4
6
5
Fig. 213. MIB save to disk phase 2
N.B.
The saved MIB folder name acronym does not correspond to the name of the MIB that you have
selected to be saved. In order to know such a correspondence open the saved folder: in the
userlbl.txt you can find such name.
Fig. 214. Correspondence between MIB saved folder and MIB saved name
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
303 / 592
This operation, carried out by ECT through the Network Element Synthesis screen, allows to load a MIB
previously saved on a floppy disk into ECTs MIB area.
N.B.
This example depicts the Load from disk by using the floppydisk, but the operation can be
done through any available read/write computer resource.
1)
304 / 592
2)
select the device from which carry out the load operation (2) and open it (3)
in the opened directory (4) , select the MIB folder to load (5) , then click Open (6)
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
NE MANAGEMENT BY TCO SUITE AND CRAFT TERMINAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
305 / 592
N.B.
10
END OF SECTION
306 / 592
SECTION CONTENT
PAGE
309
329
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
307 / 592
308 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Before starting this installation procedure, it is suggested to give a look to para.12.6 on page
58.
N.B.
Procedures described in this chapter are carried out with the PC disconnected from the NE.
31.1 Requirements
31.1.1 PC characteristics
For this SWP version, correct ECT installation requires a PC with the requirements hereafter
described:
1)
HW Configuration
2)
CPU:
Pentium III 850 MHz
RAM:
512 Mbytes
Hard Disk space: 4 Gbytes
Display Resolution: 1024x768 pixel
CDROM Drive:
24X
Primary Interface: Serial Port RS232C 9.6 to 57.6 Kbits/sec.
Communication Interfaces:
RS232 serial port is mandatory, if local communication with NEs ECT serial port
(Finterface) is required.
N.B.
In alternative, for the usage of the NEs Finterface with any PC having no
RS232 serial port (but obviously with USB ports available) it is possible to
employ the USB TO RS232 ADAPTER , ordering it to AlcatelLucent
(P/N 1AF11294AA**).
Windows Versions
Windows XP (Professional Edition only) till SP2: It is mandatory deactivate the Firewall
installed.
Windows NT partially supported: CTK 3.3 and related Q3/SNMP addon deliveries can
be run on Windows NT but you have to take in account some restrictions in Almap PC 6.5
and PC 7.0 components. They must be considered as Craft Terminal platform restrictions
in Windows NT environment.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
309 / 592
Additional SW requirements
Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.4.212 or higher (the necessary version is
included in the SWP CDROM)
Browser:
System default browser that correctly supports XHTML 1.1 and CSS 2.1 standards:
In users Windows system desktop folder, files with the following names must not be
present:
Default_211.qcml
QCML_211.xsd
QCML_211.xsl
Through systems Display Properties, Settings tab, clicking on Advanced button, the
Display DPI setting should be set to Normal Size (96 DPI);
The operator shall be familiar with the use of personal computers in WINDOWSNT / WINDOWS
2000 / WINDOWS XP (Professional Edition only) environment, internally to which the Network
Elements application software operates.
b)
Furthermore, for a number of configuration applications, the operator shall be aware of some
specifications of the International Standard Organization (ISO) and of the standards applied to the
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) (ITUT Recommendations).
c)
For the installation of SW packages, the Operators PC privilege and skill must be those of System
Administrator.
d)
The Operator shall be familiar with the use of Alcatel 1320CT functionalities. If necessary, a good
approach to the related matters is to read and understand the following sections of the 1320CT Basic
Craft Terminal Operators Handbook (see Tab. 78. on page 571 ):
section INTRODUCTION
section GETTING STARTED
310 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
3)
Only SNMP management of 9400AWY V2.1.1 through Ethernet interface (by CT and TCO Suite).
In this case you must carry out the following main phases:
b)
1)
1320CT Package Installation (installation of SWP components from the SWP CDROM):
para.31.5 on page 314
2)
3)
4)
5)
CT initial configuration:
para.31.9 on page 326
6)
EML construction:
para.31.10 on page 327
Only SNMP management of 9400AWY V2.1.1 through Ethernet interface (by CT and TCO Suite),
as point a ) above, with the additional possibility of management through the NEs ECT serial port
(by CT)
In this case you must carry out the procedure described in Appendix C Additional SW installation
operations for NE management through the NEs ECT serial port on page 517
c)
N.B.
Management of SNMP 9400AWY V2.1.1 [as case a ) or b ) above] and of other SWPs for different
NEs (e.g. AlcatelLucent 9600USY, 9600LSY)
In this case, before doing anything, read carefully para.31.4 on page 312
Chapter 410 on page 497 describes how to to deinstall the Software Package from the PC.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
311 / 592
If you like to install different AlcatelLucent SWPs (1320CTbased) in the same PC, you must be aware
that there are some SW components to be installed which are common to such SWPs.
The basic principle is that, due the ascendant compatibility, for such common components you must take
and install, from each SWP, the highest version components, e.g.:
Craft Terminal Base Platform [Craft Terminal Base Platform Q3 AddOn (EMLIM)] : highest version
as far as the SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1 is concerned, JRE and Alcatel Lower Layers
Manager do not appear in the SWP CDROM startup screen because:
Alcatel Lower Layers Manager is installed, if necessary, on Operator explicit request only,
as explained in para.53.2 on page 519.
To make the comparison between the versions of the common SW components, please refer to the
Product Release Notes (see para.57.2.2 on page 571 ) associated to the SWPs you want to install.
In term of method to install:
use CT installation Product Guided and select component depending of the rule before;
install at first the SWP with the common SW components highest versions, and after the other SWPs
leaving unselected the common SW components already installed.
Please extend these considerations to the need of installing more than two different SWPs.
Procedure example (referred to the two SWP cited above):
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
compare the PC characteristics and verify that your PC meets the highest requirements (as far
as the SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1 is concerned, refer to para.31.1.1 on pages 309310
uninstall all AlcatelLucent products (the clean situation simplifies the following operations)
carry out the installation of LLMAN from the SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1 CDROM as
described in para.53.2 on page 519, because its version is higher than that of the SWP
9600LSY V2.0.4
install the SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1 , as described in para.31.5 on page 314, selecting all
components, because its common SW components have versions higher than those of the
SWP 9600LSY V2.0.4
complete the SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1 installation as described in steps 2 ) to 6 ) of point
a ) on page 311
using the CT installation Product Guided, start the installation of the SWP 9600LSY V2.0.4,
deselecting (see following Fig. 218. ) the components JRE V1.3 , Alcatel Lower Layers
Manager V3.4.0 , CTK v3.2.0 and HOLCTKADDON v1.1.0, because already installed
(with higher versions) by the SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1 installation
complete the SWP 9600LSY V2.0.4 installation as described in relevant documentation.
312 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
common
components
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
313 / 592
N.B.
Please read carefully para.31.3 on page 311, for the position of this step inside the whole
installation procedure.
N.B.
Procedures described in the following are carried out with the PC disconnected from the NE.
Windows versions supported are just those listed in point 2 ) on page 309 (e.g. Windows XP
Home Edition, Windows 95, 98, ME, etc. are not supported).
N.B.
System browser versions supported are just those listed in point 3 ) on page 310 (other versions
are not supported).
N.B.
Windows NT is partially supported: CTK 3.3 and related Q3/SNMP addon deliveries can be
run on Windows NT with some restrictions.
N.B.
WARNING:
N.B.
Note for Users having previously used SWP 9400AWY versions up to V2.0.3:
This behavior takes place from V2.0.4: the 1320CT installation of this SWP does not include
anymore the Q3CTKAddOn component.
In particular, if LLMAN component is not installed because you want to manage AWY NEs only
by Ethernet interface, also Q3CTKAddOn component has not to be installed (or has to be
explicitly deinstalled if previously installed) in order to have a correct behavior on 1320CT
usage.
Obviously, as also applied to previous SW releases, it is mandatory to install LLMAN component
in order to be able to manage AWY NEs by Serial F interface and in this case Q3CTKAddOn
component can be installed to enable the possibility to manage also Q3 NEs with the same
1320CT installation.
N.B.
Notes for Users having previously used any SWP 9400AWY previous versions:
When installing this SWP on a PC where are already installed the previous:
SWP 2.0.3, 2.0.4 or 2.1.x versions, it is mandatory select all the components in the
installation procedure
any 1.0.x and 2.0.x versions, it is not necessary to deinstall them from PC.
314 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Verify that the PC characteristics meet all HW and SW requirements specified in para.31.1.1
on page 309
2)
Verify you do have the SWP CDROM P/N REF.[a] in Tab. 53. (page 141)
3)
WARNING : whenever you have already installed a previousversion SWP V2.1.1 including the
TCO Suite, delete the existing shortcut to the Start_html icon as well as the TCOSuite folder
(see Fig. 227. on page 320). Note: it is not necessary to delete shortcut to the Start_html icon
relevant to previous SWP V2.0.x.
2)
The TCO Suite startup begins. Please refer to para.22.2.3 for the procedure execution and
the management of special conditions that could occur
3)
At the end of the TCO Suite startup, the CDROM TCO Suite Main Menu screen appears
(Fig. 219. below); click on Advanced Settings button
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
315 / 592
After a while, the CDROM TCO Suite Advanced Settings screen appears (Fig. 220. ); click on
1320CT Package Installation button
After a while, the SWP component selection screen appears (Fig. 221. ); leave all components
selected (or click on Select All button), then click on Next button
316 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
4)
6)
The installation process begins. After its completion (time depends on PC performance), the
following screen appears; clicking on confirmation button (YES / S), the installation report is
produced
At any time, you can also check the components installed (Fig. 223. ) carrying out,
in Windows environment:
Start Settings Control Panel Add/Remove Programs
317 / 592
N.B.
Please read carefully para.31.3 on page 311, for the position of this step inside the whole
installation procedure.
This step is mandatory to have all TCO Suite functionalities (with exception of those related to the SWP
installation in PC environment) available from the PC after the extraction of the SWP CDROM from the
PCs CDROM unit.
31.6.1 Operations sequence
1)
In the CDROM TCO Suite Advanced Settings screen (Fig. 220. on page 316) click on Local
Copy of TCO Suite button
2)
Fig. 224. below: user is asked to choose the location where save must be done; such a location
could be on the local PC or on a USB Key, Flash Memory Card, etc. Confirm or change it, and
proceed
N.B.
TCOSuite.206 folder, that was created installing the SWP 9400AWY R.2.0.4
TCOSuite.217 folder, that was created installing the SWP 9400AWY R.2.1.0
It is not necessary to delete them, because the Local Copy of TCO Suite from this
SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1 CDROM will create another folder (see Fig. 227. on
page 320).
WARNING: If you delete them, you will loose the TCO functionalities associated
respectively to the SWP 9400AWY R.2.0.4 and SWP 9400AWY R.2.1.0
318 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
3)
Where the user selects to put the TCO Suite, will be created a TCOSuite directory with the
content of the same TCO Suite located on CDROM. The copy will proceed with a clear show
of the progress (Fig. 225. below).
The user can also cancel the copy operation and all the files copied will be removed
(Fig. 226. below).
Since Java is not systemspecific, neither shortcut to local TCO Suite Start.html page, nor
Microsoft Windows Start menu entry for TCO Suite can be created automatically. User should
provide to create them as follows (see following Fig. 227. ): open the TCO Suite folder [from the
location established in previous step 2 ) ], and create a shortcut to the Start.html icon on the PCs
desktop.
N.B.
Following the example of Fig. 224. on page 318, in order to create the shortcut, pay
attention to open the new folder that has been created now, and to give it a mnemonic
name different from the shortcut associated to the preexisting SWP.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
319 / 592
New folder
(SWP V2.1.1)
OPEN
LINK
PC DESKTOP
shortcut to
TCO 2.1.1
320 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Preexisting folders
(SWP V2.0.4 & V2.1.0)
This description is retrieved from 1320CT Basic Operators Handbook and is repeated here for
ease of operation.
This phase must be manually carried out by the Operator and has the scope of making the new equipment
software package available for its downloading toward the NEs equipment controller and the peripheral
units (such a downloading is explained in Chapter 48 on page 485).
This operation is independent from the NE management state and must be executed with the following
procedure:
1)
Start 1320CT
For details, refer to point e ) on page 174
2)
On NES (Network Element Synthesis) screen that opens, from the Supervision pull down
menu select the File Administration and then the Software Administration option, as shown
in Fig. 228. herebelow.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
321 / 592
In the screen that opens (Fig. 230. on page 323 is an example) select the directory where the
NE software package is installed:
Alcatel / JUSMw V.x.x.x / ect / swdw / <equipment name> / <version> / <descriptor file> (*)
(*)
N.B.
WARNING:
The NE software package can also be selected from the CDROM used for the
installation of the NE software. In this case, after inserting the CDROM in the driver,
choose the following:
ect / swdw / <equipment name> / <version> / <descriptor file>
in case you have still installed in your PC one or more previous AlcatelLucent SWP, in
step [2] of Fig. 230. on page 323, you must be sure to open the JUSM folder relevant to
the SWP you have installed now. In such an example:
JUSMw2.4.7 is associated to SWP 9400AWY 2.1.1 [you can check the JUSM version
comparing it with the report produced at installation end (see Fig. 222. on page
317 )].
In any case, whenever the version to be selected in step [6] of Fig. 230. on page 323 is
not that you wanted, you can go backward to step [2] to explore the correct JUSM folder.
322 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
4)
CONTINUES
Fig. 230. Directory selection for the descriptor file .DSC
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
323 / 592
End of Fig. 230. Directory selection for the descriptor file .DSC
324 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
5)
On last screen (containing the .DSC file), click on Open to activate the installation of the
selected.DSC file. At the end of the process, a confirmation message is displayed:
6)
At this point the NE Software Package is installed and available to be downloaded on the
Network Elements (as described in chapter 48 on page 485).
Such availability can be verified (as shown in Fig. 231. herebelow) operating in the Network
Element Synthesis screen (Fig. 228. on page 321), selecting, from the Supervision pull down
menu, the File Administration and then the Software Administration option.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
325 / 592
N.B.
Procedures described in the following are carried out with the PC disconnected from the NE.
PC hostname
CT configuration
Screen settings
326 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
The set of procedures necessary to configure the ECT in order to manage the Network Elements (which
include the management of Maps, Submaps and Network Elements, like creation, deletion, saving,
opening, etc) is named EML construction .
In order to carry out these procedures, refer to the:
1320CT Basic Craft Terminal Rel.3.x Operators Handbook (see Tab. 78. on page 571)
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
327 / 592
328 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Meaning
Manual action
Check/Verify
CT
The commissioning operations described in this document are for a link between a station A and a station
B.
If the network includes supervision, station A is the one located between the supervisory station and
station B (see figure below). Installation and commissioning begin at station A.
STATION A
ODU
STATION B
ODU
IDU
IDU
Network
(Supervision Side)
Network
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
329 / 592
Before proceeding with this operation ensure that you have the equipment and accessories required for
that purpose. All these materials should be present in the service bag.
The commissioning procedure is summarized as follows:
Turn up (phase 1)
Station A, carry out all the commissioning checks and tests Report the results in the TRS
Station B, carry out all the commissioning checks and tests Report the results in the TRS
QTY
CHARACTERISTICS
Multimeter
330 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
drawings on page
332
333
334
335
336
337
N.B.
As far as the 1+0 configurations are concerned, two interconnection drawings are depicted:
the other with the protection box(es), which allows the easy expansion to the
corresponding 1+1 configuration just installing and cabling the IDU Extension unit
without altering the User line connections already existing on the IDU Main unit.
connector pinout at User line side, in the case the protection boxes are not used. When they are used,
you can find the User line side connector pinout in this manual:
E1 Protection box
from page 79
from page 84
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
331 / 592
ODU CH1
Main
PS
Main
ODU CH1
PS
1+1 CONFIGURATION
E1 lineside user interface
connectors
Main
ODU CH1
PS
ODU CH0
PS
Extension
Fig. 233. Equipment interconnections for configurations with 16E1
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
332 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
32.2.2 Configurations with 16E1 + Audio and User Service Channel plugin
WARNING: for 1+0 configurations, read carefully N.B. on page 331
1+0 CONFIGURATION WITHOUT PROTECTION BOXES
Alarms & Housekeepings & NMS interface cable
E1 interface cable
Audio & Service channels interface cable
ODU CH1
Main
PS
Main
ODU CH1
PS
1+1 CONFIGURATION
Alarms & Housekeepings & NMS &
Audio & Service channels lineside
user interface connectors
Main
ODU CH1
PS
ODU CH0
PS
Extension
Fig. 234. Equipment interconnections for configurations with 16E1 + Audio and User Service Channel
plugin
USER MANUAL
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
333 / 592
Main
ODU CH1
PS
1+1 CONFIGURATION
E1 lineside user interface
connectors
4 x Ethernet
cables
Alarms & Housekeepings
& NMS interface cable
Main
ODU CH1
PS
ODU CH0
PS
Extension
Fig. 235. Equipment interconnections for configurations with 16E1 + Enhanced Ethernet plugin
334 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
32.2.4 Configurations with 16E1 + Enhanced Ethernet plugin + Audio and User Service
Channel plugin
WARNING: for 1+0 configurations, read carefully N.B. on page 331
1+0 CONFIGURATION WITHOUT PROTECTION BOXES
Alarms & Housekeepings & NMS interface cable
E1 interface cable
PS
Main
Main
ODU CH1
PS
1+1 CONFIGURATION
Alarms & Housekeepings & NMS &
Audio & Service channels lineside
4 x Ethernet
user interface connectors
cables
Main
ODU CH1
PS
ODU CH0
PS
Extension
Fig. 236. Equipment interconnections for configurations with 16E1 + Enhanced Ethernet plugin +
Audio and User Service Channel plugin
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
335 / 592
E1 interface cables
ODU CH1
Main
PS
Main
ODU CH1
PS
1+1 CONFIGURATION
E1 lineside user interface
connectors
Main
ODU CH1
PS
ODU CH0
PS
Extension
336 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
32.2.6 Configurations with 32E1 + Audio and User Service Channel plugin
WARNING: for 1+0 configurations, read carefully N.B. on page 331
1+0 CONFIGURATION WITHOUT PROTECTION BOXES
Alarms & Housekeepings & NMS interface cable
E1 interface cables
ODU CH1
PS
Main
ODU CH1
PS
1+1 CONFIGURATION
E1 lineside user interface
connectors
Main
ODU CH1
PS
ODU CH0
PS
Extension
Fig. 238. Equipment interconnections for configurations with 32E1 + Audio and User Service Channel
plugin
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
337 / 592
Where necessary, switch OFF the power supply before disconnecting the earth
connection,
Do not connect instruments directly to the IDU/ODU cable connector since the
connector carries 48v DC used to supply the ODU.
Do not connect the IF cable between IDU and ODU while the IDU is powered up.
The antenna of station A is pointed towards station B the best as possible (use compass if
necessary).
The power supply voltage is present (48, 60 V DC) with the correct polarity at the IDU power
supply input
In 1+1 configuration, check the connections between main and extension IDU(s)
Tributaries and service channel access are cabled on the station DDF
The ODU(s) ground connections (In the case of a nonintegrated antenna, the antenna and the
ODU(s) must be ground connected)
338 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
make the Central Frequency and Shifter values of ODUs be acquired by IDU (so that they are
retained in the NEs data base).
Proceed as follows:
a)
b)
Connect the crossconnect Ethernet cable between the Ethernet port of the PC and the
Ethernet interface on the Main IDU (see Fig. 76. on page 170).
In alternative connect the RS232 cable between the serial port of the PC and the F interface
(ECT) on the Main IDU (see Fig. 76. on page 170).
2)
3)
Startup the Craft Terminal and wait for the Network Element Synthesis screen
4)
Give the NE icon a mnemonic name (e.g. STAZ A as in Fig. 83. on page 177)
5)
6)
Login the local Network Element, using the Administrator UserName & Password
7)
Wait for the main Equipment view (CT) to appear (for details, refer to para.22.6 on page 181)
c)
Check that CT and NE versions are both V2.1.1 (for details, refer to para.12.6.3 on page 62).
If NOT, proceed as specified in Chapter 49 on page 495.
d)
Start the Quick Configuration Procedure clicking on Main Tool Bars icon Quick Configuration
(see Fig. 88. on page 183), or select Configuration Quick Configuration from the Menu bar.
The window in Fig. 245. on page 347 will appear. This window is the first step of the Interactive
Quick Configuration Procedure. Clicking repeatedly on Next button (without any other actions),
reach Step C on page 353 (Channel configuration) and confirm the Frequency Values fields.
Then, clicking repeatedly on Next buttons (without any other actions), reach Step L on page 368 and
click on Finish button. In this way the Frequency Values fields are saved in the NEs data base, and
will be available even if the ODU(s) is/are disconnected.
Close JUSM and stop Supervision on the NE (for details, refer to para.22.5.3 on page 180). Leave
PC and CT ready for next operations
b)
c)
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
339 / 592
N.B.
Make sure that IDUODU cable is disconnected from the IDU(s) in order to verify via CT
the System PTx Power and Frequency Tx settings as foreseen by Plant documentation
before powering up the ODU(s).
Since the IDU(s)ODU(s) connection is not established, when powering up the IDU(s),
the ODU(s) will not be operating and then the IDU(s) will display the relative Alarms.
After switching on the wall circuit breakers, poweron the Main IDU then the Extension IDU if any
via the front panel power supplies switches.
Login again the local Network Element, using the Administrator UserName & Password.
b)
c)
340 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
By this modality, you do not need to login any NE; its main steps are:
a ) launch the application,
b ) create and check the NE configuration,
c ) save the configuration file ( format is configuration_name.qcml ).
This file will be after used to configure the NE (after having logged it) with a simple load
command.
For the execution of this procedure, refer to para.32.3.8 on page 344.
[3]
TCO Suite SetUp Tool: online recover, modification and application of a provisioning
file (not interactive)
By this modality, you access one NE, not using the Craft Terminal application, but the TCO Suite
web server; its main steps are:
a ) launch the application and the connection with the target NE,
b ) recover a configuration file configuration_name.qcml previously created (e.g. through
the TCO Suite PreProvisioning Tool), or get configuration data from the NE
c ) check/modify the configuration,
d ) apply the configuration to the target NE.
For the execution of this procedure, refer to para.32.3.9 on page 345.
WARNING:
the execution of the TCO Suite SetUp Tool is denied to the Viewer operator
profile
N.B.
In alternative, through the TCO Suites Alarms & Settings function (see para.22.3 on page
156), it is possible:
to get from a NE its own configuration text Report (Configuration Info , see para.22.3.4
on page 161).
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
341 / 592
The bottom buttons available in the screens depend on the configuration tool started, and are
contextspecific, e.g.:
Back: by clicking on this button the procedure goes back to the previous step
Next: by clicking on this button the procedure goes on the next step
Finish or Apply to the NE : this button is active only in the last step. By clicking on this button the
operator confirms the configuration and the new parameters are sent to the equipment
Save As: by clicking on this button, the configuration can be saved as a configuration_name.qcml
file (provide a mnemonic name)
Save & Apply: by clicking on this button, two operations are carried out:
Save: the configuration and the new parameters are temporarily saved on the system disc N.B.
and then:
N.B.
the file is saved under the user home directory, inside the TCO SUITEs temporary file
folder. For example, in Windows XP it is:
Help: by clicking on this button the operator calls the helpon line
WARNING: the Help button is operative in the CT environment only. It is not operative in the TCO
SUITE environment.
342 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
32.3.6.1 Note on the use of the bottom buttons available in the screens
With the Quick Configuration (interactive), the configurations parameters displayed in the
various steps are taken from those actually stored in the NE data base. You can check them
and modify (if necessary), then go to the following step. The last step is Step L on page 368.
In such a step you can:
and / or click on Finish button: configuration data are stored in the NE data base.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
343 / 592
To launch this application, click on the button PreProvisioning Tool of the TCO Suite Main Page (see
Fig. 55. and Fig. 56. on page 149).
This button is a oneclick execution for the PreProvisioning Tool. User could see a socalled splash
screen (Fig. 239. below), a temporary message that will disappear after 10 seconds or by clicking on it
with the mouse.
or Create configuration : in this case, the configuration process starts from default data.
In both cases, the window in Fig. 245. on page 347 will appear. This window is the first step of the
procedure. Proceed as specified in para.32.3.10 on page 346, checking and modifying data as
necessary. The last step is Step L on page 368. In such a step you can only click on Save As button:
configuration data are saved in a configuration_name.qcml file (provide a mnemonic name).
344 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
32.3.8 TCO Suite PreProvisioning Tool: offline creation, modification and save of a
provisioning file (not interactive)
32.3.9 TCO Suite SetUp Tool: online recover, modification and application of a provisioning
file (not interactive)
To launch this application, click on the button SetUp Tool of the TCO Suite Main Page (see Fig. 55. and
Fig. 56. on page 149).
User could see a socalled splash screen (Fig. 242. below), a temporary message that will disappear
after 10 seconds or by clicking on it with the mouse.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
345 / 592
Get configuration from NE : in this case, the configuration process starts with data taken from the
NE; this modality is exactly the same you can do by Craft Terminal through the Quick Configuration
(interactive)
or Create configuration : in this case, the configuration process starts from default data.
In all cases, the window in Fig. 245. on page 347 will appear. This window is the first step of the procedure.
Proceed as specified in para.32.3.10 on page 346, checking and modifying data as necessary.
The last step is Step L on page 368. In such a step you can:
click on Save As button: configuration data are saved in a configuration_name.qcml file (provide
a mnemonic name)
and / or click on Apply to NE button: configuration data are stored in the NE data base.
Following screens do not show the bottom buttons, that depend on the tool by which the
configuration procedure has been started and by the context. For their use please refer to
para.32.3.6.1 on page 342.
346 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
in interactive modality, this screen is set with values taken from NEs data base
1+0:
unprotected configuration
1+1 HSB:
Hot Standby protected configuration
1+1 FD:
Frequency Diversity protected configuration
c)
16E1:
max 16xE1 without Ethernet plugin
32E1:
max 32xE1
N.B.
the number of actually usable tributaries depends on the employed Software Label
(see Tab. 23. on page 93 )
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
347 / 592
Power Supply Unit: in this SWP version, only PSU4860 choice is meaningful
N.B.
choices PSUVAC and PSU2460 are relevant to hardware items not presently available
e)
f)
Area Structure:
g)
Structure of the Radio Frame configuration : fields (Radio) Capacity and (Radio) Modulation.
The capacity implies the choice of modulation; for example, if the tributary structure is 2E1, only
4QAM modulation scheme is supported.
The association between Radio Capacity and Radio Modulation is shown in Tab. 64. below:
Tab. 64. Radio application: Capacity and modulation
N.B.
Radio Modulation
2xE1
4QAM
4xE1
4QAM / 16QAM
8xE1
4QAM / 16QAM
16xE1
4QAM / 16QAM
32xE1
16QAM
the actually usable Radio Capacity and Modulation types depend on the employed
Software Label (see Tab. 23. on page 93 )
WARNING:
N.B.
Radio Capacity
When you change the modulation scheme (from 4 QAM to 16 QAM or viceversa)
the Tx power (in case of operation with RTPC) and the ATPC range (in case of
operation with ATPC) of the new modulation scheme must be in the correct range
(refer to para. 26.4 on page 238). If the value is out of range the relevant field in the
RTPC & ATPC screen appears empty (automatically is associated a default value,
but this value is not displayed).
Fill the field with the suitable value.
For the Remote NE, parameters belonging to this step cannot be modified.
To modify them, the System Settings menu must be used (refer to para. 23.4.1 on page 210).
At the first configuration (i.e. with a flash card with an empty MIB) at the end of the
configuration the Restart NE must be performed (refer to para. 28.2 on page 160).
348 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
d)
in interactive modality, this screen is set with values taken from NEs data base
one PDH tributary port configuration screen, see point [1] below
and four Ethernet port configuration screens (only if Enhanced Ethernet plugin installed and
configured), see point [2] on page 351
N.B.
[1]
This procedure can be used also after the first configuration to perform multiple changes
in the configuration both in the local and in the remote NE.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
349 / 592
In order to allow the actual configuration and transmission of the Ethernet data streams, it is
mandatory that, except the case of 32xE1 Radio Capacity:
and that the position (according to Fig. 246. on page 349 ) of such disabled PDH tributary port
is one of first four.
N.B.
If such operation is not done, the following error message is raised by the system
when you click on button Next to go to the next step:
so that, to go on with the procedure, you must click OK and go back to the screen of
Fig. 246. on page 349 to disable one PDH tributary port.
(*)
Number of allowed
PDH (E1) Tributaries
2xE1
E1 1
4xE1
E1 3
8xE1
E1 7
16xE1
E1 15
32xE1
E1 16
Number of allowed
Ethernet Ports with
Enhanced Ethernet
plugin (n.b.2)
Ethernet
Bandwidth
[N x (E1capacity)]
N2
GE 4
(10/100/1000BT)
N4
N8
N 16
16 N 32
n.b.1
the actually usable Radio Capacity depends on the employed Software Label (see
Tab. 23. on page 93 )
n.b.2
in any combination.
In the screen displayed in Fig. 246. on page 349 (and in the following Steps), the Back button is enabled
also. It allows the operator to turn back and change the parameters configured in the previous screen.
Now, if in Step A (Fig. 245. on page 347) you have defined 16E1GData, proceed to next substep [2]
on page 351
Otherwise:
350 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
[2]
For whole information on Ethernet port characteristics and management, refer to the
Appendix D on page 547
for all Ethernet Ports #33 , #34 , #35 and #36 , even if one or more are disabled (i.e. with Port
Status field not Enabled).
If this setting is not done, the following error message is raised by the system when you click
on button Next to go to the next step:
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
351 / 592
For detailed information on QoS configuration, refer to point [8] on page 551
To go to the next step click on button Next.
To go back to the previous step click on button Back.
352 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Fig. 248. Quick Configuration Procedure Step B: Ethernet GPort QoS configuration
in interactive modality, this screen is set with values taken from NEs data base [if you are executing
this step inside the commissioning procedure, ODU(s) is/are disconnected, but the relevant
frequency values have been acquired by IDU during operations of para.32.3.2 on page 339 ]
1+0
1+1 HSB
1+1 FD
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
353 / 592
[1]
Interactive mode
a)
b)
N.B.
If necessary, you can exploit the Frequency Data Help, described below, in
Interactive mode too.
Note: During the command setting, the CT is frozen. Waiting time: max 30.
After having set the frequency data, carry out ATPC data setting (next substep [2] on page
356). (Note: if you have gone to following Step F, go back to this Step C).
354 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
By this screen, you must set two types of configuration data: frequency data (substep [1] on page 354),
and ATPC data (substep [2] on page 356), taking into account that, in case of:
1+0 and 1+1 HSB configurations, you must set data for one frequency only
2)
values used in
example of
Fig. 252. below
Fig. 251. Frequency Data Help: frequency data of chosen ODU type (example)
N.B.
The content of these tables is the same of the tables present in:
para.14.5.1 from page 105 (Part lists of ODUs with external diplexer)
para.14.5.2 from page 108 (Part lists of ODUs with embedded diplexer)
Thus, in non interactive mode, use values retrieved from such helponline tables to fill the
Frequency Values fields of screens of Fig. 249. on page 353.
Following Fig. 252. shows an example of Frequency Data manual setting with values taken
from the table of Fig. 251. above.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
355 / 592
if ATPC is disabled, the power (constantly transmitted) can be selected by writing the suitable
value in the Tx power field in the RTPC area (see following Fig. 253. )
if ATPC is enabled, the RTPC field is greyed (cannot be selected), and the other ATPC
parameters (Max TX Power value, Min TX Power value, and Low Rx Power threshold value)
must be configured in the ATPC area fields (see following Fig. 254. ):
and obviously setting Max TX Power value > Min TX Power value.
WARNING:
if you want to set the minimum value of the range greater than the current
maximum value, you must at first change the maximum value, then change the
minimum value (obviously setting it smaller than maximum)
356 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Fig. 255. ATPC and RTPC Configuration for both channels (1+1 HSB)
To go to the next step click on button Next.
To go back to the previous step click on button Back.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
357 / 592
The amount of microwave links, especially in urban areas, puts the problem of possible interferences
during installation and turnon phase.
The digital frame incorporates link identity coding capabilities to prevent the capture of an unwanted signal.
Link identifier management can be:
enabled selecting the choice Mismatch Detection in the screen of Fig. 256. below
In case of enabled Link identifier management, it is necessary to provide the NEs with the suitable sent
and expected link identifiers values. The NE originating the section inserts the sent identifier. The NE
terminating the section extracts the received identifier and compares this value to the expected one.
received identifier = B
sent identifier = A
STATION A
sent identifier = B
received identifier = A
STATION B
When the mismatch detection is enabled and the value of the incoming identifier is different from the
expected one, a Link Identifier Mismatch (LIM) is notified and an AIS signal will be inserted down stream.
Link identifier functionality is managed per NE: in case of 1+1 radio configurations the same link identifier
code is used on both the radio channels.
Link identifier functionality is performed by 5 bits link code, then 32 values link code are allowed.
358 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
in interactive modality, this screen is set with values taken from NEs data base
Fig. 257. Quick Configuration Procedure: Automatic restoration criteria configuration (Step E)
To go to the next step click on button Next .
To go back to the previous step click on button Back.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
359 / 592
REMIND:
in interactive modality, this screen is set with values taken from NEs data base
To create a new area write a number in the Area Id field, in the IP address field write the address and click
on Add button.
If the OSPF area must be a stub area, make the selection in the Stub Area check box.
WARNING:
When the area is a Stub area, all interfaces inside the same Stub Area (NMS and
Ethernet) must be defined Stub.
In the upper part of the screen the new OSPF area will appear.
To remove or change an OSPF Area Configuration select the Area in the upper part and click on Remove
or Change button.
To go to the next step click on button Next.
To go back to the previous step click on button Back.
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
360 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
in interactive modality, this screen is set with values taken from NEs data base
Fig. 259. Quick Configuration Procedure: Local IP address, Ethernet and NTP configuration (Step G)
This step (Fig. 259. above) allows to configure:
the Local IP address associated to the F interface of the NE. This address is that used to identify
the NE as far as the RECT function is concerned.
the Ethernet interface: it can be Enabled or Disabled by ticking the TMN Ethernet field (default
is Enabled). If enabled, enter in the relevant fields the IP address, the IP mask and select the
Routing protocol. If the selected routing protocol is OSPF, select also the area number in the
associated OSPF Area field.
WARNING: please do never use the RIP choice present in the Routing Protocol field!
Rules for the definition of the NEs Local IP and Ethernet IP addresses:
as delivered from AlcatelLucent Factory, the NEs Local IP and Ethernet IP addresses
are both set at default value 10.0.1.2 ;
obviously, these values must be changed to have them different from each other and from
those of the other NEs present in the accessible network. In particular such two addresses
must not belong to the same subnetwork (i.e. the third digit must be different. Examples:
the Network Time Protocol (NTP). To enable the NTP put a tick in the check box of the NTP field.
If the NTP has been enabled, write in the Main Server field the IP address of the Server, which
distributes the NTP, and write in the Spare Server field the IP address of the Spare Server, if any,
which will distribute the NTP in case of failure in the Main Server.
N.B.
It is mandatory to define both the Main Server address and the Spare Server address.
In case a Spare Server is not available, fill its address field with the
same value of the Main Server.
To go to the next step click on button Next .
To go back to the previous step click on button Back.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
361 / 592
REMIND:
in interactive modality, this screen is set with values taken from NEs data base
Fig. 260. Quick Configuration Procedure: Configuration of TMNRF, TMNV11 and TMNG703
channels (Step H)
This step (Fig. 260. above) allows to configure the following TMN channels:
the TMNRF interface is a communication interface based on the use of an inframe RF proprietary
64 kbit/s channel. Through this interface the NE can exchange management messages with a remote
OS (or Craft Terminal) station.
through the TMNV11 or the TMNG703 interface the NE can exchange management messages
with an OS (or Craft Terminal) in the same station.
Each TMN channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in its own Enable field.
If enabled, in the Remote Address field will appear the IP address of the remote connected NE.
In the Routing IP Protocol field enter the used IP protocol and in case of OSPF protocol select also the
associated OSPF area.
In the Mode field of the TMNV11 and TMNG703 interfaces the following selections can be made:
DTE mode:
to interface an SDH service channel, where DCE mode is not available because of the common
synchronization of the SDH network.
Codirectional mode:
to allow the routing of the LUX40 NMS, avoiding the needed V11/Eth adapter or to link adjacent AWY.
362 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
363 / 592
REMIND:
in interactive modality, this screen is set with values taken from NEs data base
Host Address:
[2]
Network Address:
[3]
Gateway Address:
[4]
PPP:
it allows to use the point to point interfaces (the 3 NMS channels) available
with the NE.
WARNING:
364 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
N.B.
in interactive modality, this screen is set with values taken from NEs data base
Fig. 263. Quick Configuration Procedure: Default Gateway Routing configuration (Step I)
In this screen operate as follows:
a)
b)
c)
d)
click Add
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
365 / 592
REMIND:
in interactive modality, this screen is set with values taken from NEs data base
in not interactive modality, fields of this screen are with default values
This step (Fig. 264. below) appears only if the Audio/User Service Channels plugin configuration has
been defined in step A. It allows the operator to choose:
the field Phone Number in the Order Wire Configuration area allows the operator to read and
write the station number associated to the Engineering Order Wire to be used in the selective call.
Possible values are: 1099 (see chapter 42 on page 413 for details)
N.B.
the field Type in the Auxiliary Interface Configuration area allows the operator to change the
interface of the auxiliary channels (see para.13.6.4 on page 90 for details)
Fig. 264. Quick Configuration Procedure: EOW and Auxiliary Interface configuration (Step J)
366 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
in interactive modality, this screen is set with values taken from NEs data base
Fig. 265. Quick Configuration Procedure: External Input and Output Points configuration (Step K)
For:
clicking in the Polarity field, Active Closed or Active Opened can be chosen
Outputs only:
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
367 / 592
This is the last step (Fig. 266. below). The screen shown summarizes all the parameters configured during
this procedure and some relevant parameters with default values.
click on Save As button: configuration data are saved in a configuration_name.qcml file (provide
a mnemonic name)
and/or confirm the selections by pressing the Finish or Apply to NE or Save & Apply button. All the
parameters are stored and sent to the NE.
At the end of the NE updating, a summary of the values of all the parameters are shown to the
operator with the indication of the result of each request of change (OK or error message).
An indication of the parameters remained unchanged is provided too.
WARNING:
in case of problems regarding the Shifter Value and/or the Central Frequency , that
could result in one of the following error message:
Shifter Value
KO OK
Central Frequency
OK KO
you must go back to point [1] (Frequency data setting) on page 354 and check and
correct both values, not only that declared KO.
If you are inside the commissioning procedure, obviously you must have defined a correct configuration.
In this case proceed with next para.32.3.11.
368 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Step L (Summary)
Required Instruments:
Procedure:
Connect CT to IDU
. CT Views Equipment
In the left window, select ODU ch#1
n
In the lower right window, verify in the alarms list for that there is no internal communication failure
In the lower right window, verify in the alarms list that there is no TX failure.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
369 / 592
Purpose:
Required Instruments:
Procedure:
Connect CT to IDU
. CT Views Radio
From the left window select Channel #1
From the lower right window select RTPC & ATPC tab panel
n
Verify that ATPC is Disabled as already set during the quick step procedure
(If required, change the ATPC status to disable in the ATPC field then Apply)
Verify that Tx Power value complies with the suitable value already set via the quick step procedure.
(If required, change the Tx Power in the RTPC field then Apply)
370 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Required Instruments:
Procedure:
Connect CT to IDU
. CT Views Radio
From the left window select Channel #1
From the lower right window select Power Meas tab panel
In the Sample time (sec), write the suitable measurement poling time then press Start
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
371 / 592
Pressing Start will prompt a graphic monitoring view of the transmitted and received levels:
Ticking the box show details in the lower left corner will call a summary view of the TX an Rx levels:
Verify that the current Rx local End received level is < 95 dBm (no interferences)
WARNING:
If in the Tx end field the indication in dBm is +99, the Transmitter is off (or in HSB Configuration the
transmitter is in standby).
If in the Tx end field the indication in dBm is +99 and, at the same time, in the relevant Rx end field
the information in dBm is 99, probably the supervision has been lost. The confirmation of the loss
of the supervision is given by a broken red icon in NES screen.
372 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
To commission station B, perform the same operations carried on at station APhase 1 (para.32.3
on page 338).
When Station B is fully configured and operational, and assuming that the antenna in station A has
been previously correctly pointed, you should receive some field from station A. In this case, proceed
to a fine tuning of the antenna to improve as much as possible the received level.
To monitor the received level during alignment, use the Craft Terminal received power measurement
facility described in para.32.3.11.3 on page 371, or the Light service kit cable for ODU Rx power
monitoring in addition to a voltmeter (see description in Annex A: antenna alignment on page
404).
For near future tests, establish on the Station DDF hardware loops on every tributary as well as on
the User service channel.
the standard equipment interfaces for access points are in most cases considered at Station
DDF, in turn connected (in 1+1 configurations) to the lineside connectors of the E1
Protection box and of the Services Protection box (when the Audio and User Service
Channel plugin is equipped). When protection boxes are not employed, Station DDF is
connected directly to the IDU MAIN unit connectors.
Station DDF is not detailed in the drawings: refer to your own plant documentation for details.
For detailed information:
2)
3)
on the description of equipment interconnections (in all 1+0 and 1+1 configurations),
please refer to para.32.2 on page 331 , making reference to the equipment
interconnection diagram corresponding to your actual system layout.
regarding the description of IDU MAIN unit connector pinout, in case of 1+0
configurations, where protection boxes are usually not employed, please refer to the
Installation Handbook
trough a crossconnect Ethernet cable between the Ethernet port of the PC and the
Ethernet interface on the Main IDU
or trough a RS232 cable between the serial port of the PC and the F interface (ECT) on
the Main IDU.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
373 / 592
In Station A, proceed to a final fine alignment of the antenna. To monitor the received level during
alignment, use the Craft Terminal received power measurement facility described in para.32.3.11.3
on page 371, or the Light service kit cable for ODU Rx power monitoring in addition to a voltmeter
(see description in Annex A: antenna alignment on page 404).
Verify in the hop calculation that the calculated received level has been reached.
Proceed to the remote NE (station B) acquisition in the Craft Terminal map (described in following
para.32.5.1) in order to verify in the both stations:
n
Connect the cable between the serial port of the PC and the F interface (ECT) on the Main IDU.
Wait until the NES window appears, for the LLMAN to connect and the Map indicator to turn grey.
Right click on Station A NE icon and select Start supervision, or Supervision Start
n
The question mark in the NE icon disappears while the alarm status of the NE appears.
374 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Right click on the first line Map sample (or click on Map sample and select NE Directory) and
choose create SNMP NE. The following window will prompt
Write the local IP address of Station B in the TCP/IP Address field and the port number in the
TCP/IP Port field (typically: 161), then click OK.
The newly created NE will appear in the CT map as shown below.
Right click on Station B NE icon and select Start supervision, or Supervision Start
The above remote NE acquisition is described assuming that the TMNRF access have been
enabled in both Stations during Quick Configuration Procedure step H on page 362. On
the contrary, the TMNRF channel can be enabled directly through the CT menu:
CT Configuration Network Configuration IP configuration IP point to point configuration.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
375 / 592
Interfacing with the E1 Protection box, set up the following testing configuration and run on one tributary,
a minimum of one hour BER test free of error.
Remote station
ODU
ODU
IDU MAIN
IDU MAIN
E1
ERROR
ANALYZER
E1
ERROR
ANALYZER
Fig. 274. Test bench for tributary quality test
Interfacing with the Services Protection box, set up the following testing configuration and run on the
User service channel, through the hardware loopback previously established in station B, a minimum of
10 minutes BER test free of error.
Remote station
ODU
ODU
IDU MAIN
ESC
IDU MAIN
ESC
ESC loopback
DATA
ANALYZER
G.703 or V11
Fig. 275. Test bench for User service channel quality test
N.B.
In case of V.11 the loopback on the remote station cannot be performed. In this case two data
analyzer must be used.
376 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
See and fill the indoor inspection check list in the TRS.
32.6.1.2 Outdoor System installation and cabling inspection
See and fill the indoor inspection check list in the TRS.
32.6.2 Local configuration control
Purpose:
Required Instruments:
Procedure:
Connect CT to IDU
Report the Type, Market, Capacity, Modulation and Impedance into the TRS
Close.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
377 / 592
E1 port# 1
378 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
379 / 592
Channel #1
Report the ATPC Disabled status, Tx nominal Power and Tx Power setting into the
TRS
ATPC Enabled:
. CT Views Radio
In the left window
Channel #1
In the lower right window RTPC&ATPC Tab Panel
n ATPC Enabled
Repeat for Channel 0 (only in 1+1)
Report the ATPC Enabled status, ATPC Range and ATPC RX Threshold setting into
the TRS
If required, change ATPC Mode or ATPC Range or ATPC Rx Threshold then Apply
For additional information and warnings, refer to para.26.4 on page 238
380 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
32.6.2.9 Check/set the User data channel type and the station phone number
Reference screen: Fig. 113. on page 213 :
. CT Configuration System Setting Overhead Tab Panel
Report the auxiliary interface type and the Phone number into the TRS
Close
For additional information and parameter change, refer to para.23.4.3 on page 213 , or to Quick
Configuration Procedures Step J screen described on page 366
Report the Id, IP Address, IP Mask and Stub flag into the TRS
For additional information and parameter change, refer to para.23.2.4.3 on page 200 , or to Quick
Configuration Procedures Step F screen described on page 360
Report the mode, IP Routing, OSPF Area and Remote Address for Enabled connection into
the TRS
For additional information and parameter change, refer to para.23.2.4.4 on page 202 , or to Quick
Configuration Procedures Step I , point [4] described on page 364
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
381 / 592
Report the IP Address, IP Mask, IP Routing protocol and OSPF Area into the TRS
For additional information and parameter change, refer to para.23.2.3 on page 195 , or to Quick
Configuration Procedures Step G described on page 361
Report the IP Address, IP Mask and Default gateway IP Address or interface type into the
TRS
For additional information and parameter change, refer to para.23.2.4.1 on page 196 , or to Quick
Configuration Procedures Step I described on page 364
Required Instruments:
Procedure:
Connect CT to IDU
382 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
If any indication does not correspond to the expected one, press Refresh to actualize the view.
By clicking on a specific object of the drawing, the operator can navigate to the relevant CT menu view.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
383 / 592
Purpose:
lockout the channel 0 for all the duration of the channel 1 testing
Required Instruments:
Procedure:
Connect CT to IDU
Report about the Channel 1 protection switching functionality into the TRS
384 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Required Instruments:
Procedure:
Connect CT to IDU
Connect Data analyzer on one Tributary Access (At the Station DDF)
Four different near end Loopbacks have to be performed one by one. Remove previous loopback
before proceeding with the next one. A delay up to 10 seconds may be observed for each
activation/deactivation.
Ensure that the local tributary access (used to control via the data analyzer the continuity and the
quality of every loopback) is active (framed or unframed) (see para.32.6.2.3 on page 378 for more
details about tributaries configuration)
Ensure that the local transmitter is not muted. (see para.45.9.10 on page 449 for more details about
TX Mute functionality)
IDU
MUX
DEMUX
TRIB
E1
ODU
MODEM
2
RF
4
A
N
T
E
N
N
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
N.B.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
385 / 592
In the left window Tributaries TX port# NE (select tributary on which the Data Analyzer is connected)
In the lower right window Activate Apply
n
Report about the near end Tributary loopback functionality into the TRS
Report about the near end IDU Cable and ODU Cable loopback functionality into the
TRS
386 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
. CT Views Loopback
Required Instruments:
Procedure:
Connect CT to IDU
Connect Data analyzer on one Tributary Access (At the Station DDF)
One Far end loopback has to be performed under the same condition as the near end loopbacks.
Moreover, ensure that the remote transmitter like the local transmitter is not muted.
IDU
ODU
ODU
A
N
T
E
N
N
A
E1
A
N
T
E
N
N
A
RF
IDU
MUX
DEMUX
MODEM
STATION A
TRIB
E1
STATION B
Report about the Far end Tributary loopback functionality into the TRS
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
387 / 592
Purpose:
Connect CT to IDU
Connect Data analyzer on Tributary Access (At the Station DDF)
ODU
Remote station
ODU
ODU
ODU
IDU EXTENSION
IDU EXTENSION
IDU MAIN
IDU MAIN
N.B.
N.B.
Tributary loopback
E1
ERROR ANALYZER
PATTERN GENERATOR
N.B.
the diagram indicates the loopback (at remote station) and the connection (at local station)
for the first 16 E1 tributaries. To check the other ones, change connections.
Fig. 282. Test bench for tributary functionality check
388 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Assuming that all the tributaries have been enabled (Unframed status) via CT in both stations and that
every tributary are looped at the DDF in the remote station:
z
Report about the Tributary BER test and alarm CT monitoring into the TRS.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
389 / 592
Purpose:
Required Instruments: PC with Craft Terminal software and G703 / V11 64 Kbit/s Data Analyzer
Procedure:
Connect CT to IDU
Connect Data analyzer on the service channel Access (At the Station DDF)
ODU
Remote station
ODU
ODU
ODU
IDU EXTENSION
IDU EXTENSION
IDU MAIN
ESC
IDU MAIN
ESC
ESC loopback
DATA
ANALYZER
64kbit/s (G.703 or V11)
Fig. 284. Test bench for User Service Channel functionality check
Assuming that the User service Channel is looped at the DDF in the remote station:
z
Report about the 64 Kbit/s Data channel BER test into the TRS
390 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Required Instruments:
Procedure:
Connect CT to IDU
Connect Data analyzer on Main IDU Ethernet Access.
Test bench for Enhanced Ethernet plugin (4xGigabit Ethernet plugin) equipped: Fig. 285. below
Report about the Ethernet Data Channels BER test into the TRS.
ODU
Remote station
ODU
ODU
ODU
IDU EXTENSION
IDU MAIN
IDU EXTENSION
ETHERNET DATA
ANALYZER
ETHERNET DATA
ANALYZER
Fig. 285. Test bench for Optional Ethernet Data Channel functionality (with 4xGigabit Ethernet plugin)
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
391 / 592
Purpose:
Connect CT to IDU
Report the Current Tx Local End (Ptx) and the current Rx Local End (Prx) into the TRS.
For additional information, PTx and PRx levels software readings tolerance and warnings, refer to
para.26.5 on page 241
392 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Remote Station
ODU
ODU
EXTENSION
ODU
MAIN
EXTENSION
MAIN
TPH
OFF ON
EOW
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
OFF ON
2.
3.
4.
Check that yellow EOW LED on MAIN IDU is on (as well as in the remote station)
5.
On keypad, dial the twodigit remote station number or 00 for general call.
6.
Yellow EOW LED is flashing and the IDU is emitting a ring tone.
8.
Connect handset to IDU, set ON/OFF switch to ON, press # on keypad. Speak.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
393 / 592
Forced the channel 1 for all the duration of the channel 0 testing
Connect CT to IDU
Check in the summary block diagram that the full channel 0 (Tx and Rx) path is in service.
Repeat for:
and, only for HSB systems, the HSB TX Protection (see para.29.3 on page 262 )
Report about the Channel 0 protection Switching functionality into the TRS
The Forced command for channel 1 is equivalent to the Lockout command for the channel
0. In both cases, the result is that the relevant channel protection path is forced to standby
status.
For additional information and parameter change, refer to chapter 29 on page 257
394 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
395 / 592
Purpose:
Required Instruments:
Procedure:
Connect CT to IDU
Connect Data analyzer on one Tributary Access (At the Station DDF)
The Hop stability test is performed during two consecutive hours, one time, on one Tributary, in real
working condition whatever the protection configuration (1+ 0 or 1+1).
The two hours stability test must be free of error in normal propagation conditions (out of fading
period)
Via the CT, let only one active tributary in both station
In the remote Station, place a hardware loop on the relevant tributary access (at the station DDF).
In the local station, connect the E1 Data Analyzer on the relevant tributary. Check that the Tributary
Alarm Loss disappears.
Verify in both stations that there are no active software loopbacks or switching requests
Report the two hours free of error test result into the TRS.
ODU
Remote station
ODU
ODU
ODU
IDU EXTENSION
IDU EXTENSION
IDU MAIN
IDU MAIN
Tributary loopback
E1
ERROR ANALYZER
PATTERN GENERATOR
396 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
32.6.6
NE integration tests
NE Radio side acquisition has been already performed during the Turn Up (commissioning phase 1).
Refer to para.32.5.1 on page 374 for more details.
32.6.6.2 NMS Line side acquisition (if foreseen in the plant documentation)
Purpose:
Required Instruments:
Procedure:
Direction 2
ODU
V11
or
G703
A transfer cable must be placed between the G703 or V11 connectors of the two Services
Protection boxes.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
397 / 592
Right click on each NE icon and select Start supervision, or Supervision Start
Since the NMS RF side NE acquisition has already been performed, both local and remote NE of the hop
currently under commissioning are visible.
Right click on the first line Map sample (or click on Map sample and select NE Directory) and
choose create SNMP NE. The following window will prompt
Write the local IP address of Main IDU direction 2 in the TCP/IP Address field and the port number
in the TCP/IP Port field (typically: 161), then click OK.
398 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
The newly created NE (direction 2) will appear in the CT map as shown below.
.
Right click on direction 2 NE icon and select Start supervision, or Supervision Start
Right click on the NE icon and select Show equipment, or Supervision Show equipment
Report about the NE line side acquisition functionality into the TRS.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
399 / 592
Direction 1
ODU
Direction 2
ODU
Local Station
OFF ON
AUDIO 1
or
AUDIO 2
Fig. 293. Test bench for EOW line side functionality test
Make a call from IDU direction 1 to IDU direction 2 or any remote station in Direction 2:
A transfer cable must be placed between the Audio 1 or Audio 2 connectors of the two Services
Protection boxes.
Check that the line is free on both Main IDU(s) (green EOW LED is on).
On IDU direction 1:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check that the EOW LEDs turn to yellow (as well as on the IDU direction 2)
5.
On keypad, dial the twodigit number of the IDU direction 2 or any remote station in direction 2.
6.
Yellow EOW LED is flashing and the IDU is emitting a ring tone.
8.
Connect handset to IDU, set ON/OFF switch to ON, press # on keypad. Speak.
Report about the Order wire Line side functionality into the TRS.
400 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
32.6.6.3 EOW line side call (if foreseen in the plant documentation)
32.6.6.4 Housekeeping alarms setting and testing (if foreseen in the plant documentation)
N.B.
For additional information not given here, refer to chapter 27 on page 247
Six alarm inputs are available to monitor either Relay contact or open collector type external alarms.
Reference screen: Fig. 148. on page 247 :
. CT Views External Points
In the left window
In the lower right window User Label Write the suitable name for the current alarm.
Polarity Configure if the alarm must show when closed or opened
Alarm Profile Primary Alarms (by default)
Testing the external alarms monitoring:
Assuming that CPI 1 is configured in Active Closed polarity:
z
Place a hardware loop on the station DDF between CPI 1 access point (Sub D pin 6) and GND point
(Sub D Pin 10). See connection point description in para.13.6.1 on page 85.
Report about the House keeping input alarms acquisition into the TRS.
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
401 / 592
Purpose:
Configure and test the housekeeping equipment alarms outputs
Required Instruments: PC with Craft Terminal software and Multimeter (loop tester)
Procedure:
Connect CT to IDU
Three alarm outputs are dedicated to fixed equipment general alarms: IDU, ODU 1 and SPARE ODU.
Four alarm outputs CPO 1 to 4 can be configured either as equipment alarm or manual remote
control:
OUTPUT
CPO 1 to CPI 4
Connect a multimeter (loop tester mode) between CPO 1 access point (Sub D pin 4) and the
Common wire point (Sub D pin 9). See connection point description in para.13.6.1 on page 85.
OUTPUT CPO 1
Polarity
Active Closed.
Report about the House keeping Output alarms detection into the TRS.
9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
402 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
403 / 592
b)
in general, fine alignment should be done only on one station of the radio link
c)
connect a voltmeter to the ODU of such a station, through the light service kit cable (see
para.32.10 on page 405)
d)
proceed with Vertical alignment, then with Horizontal alignment, as described in the Installation
Handbook (N.B.)
e)
in configurations with two antennas, repeat the procedure for the second antenna.
N.B.
procedures for Vertical and Horizontal alignment depend on the type of integrated pole
mounting employed. All integrated pole mounting types are described in the Installation
Handbook.
404 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
10
10
11
11
12
12
Black
B
D
Red
7
12
8
7
12
8
4
10
1
9
2
1
9
11
5
View following F
6
11
5
3
View following G
4
10
(A) LEMO connector, to be plugged into LEMO connector on ODU (see Fig. 46. on page 120 and
Fig. 47. on page 121)
banana plugs (C) and (D) : output is a 0 to +3V DC voltage proportional to the radio Rx field. During
equipment lineup, through a multimeter it is possible to easily point the antenna until the measured
voltage is the maximum, corresponding to the maximum radio Rx field. Actual Rx field value can be
measured by means of the Craft Terminal (see para.26.5 on page 241).
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
405 / 592
a)
END OF SECTION
406 / 592
USER MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
PAGE
MAINTENANCE
Chapter 41 Maintenance Policy
It introduces the basic concepts for the equipment maintenance.
409
413
415
421
429
465
UPGRADE
Chapter 47 System hardware upgrade
This chapter details all phases necessary to install tributary plugins, or to upgrade
9400AWY system from (1+0) to (1+1) configuration, or to replace the Flash Card
to improve system capacity.
469
485
495
497
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
407 / 592
408 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
41 MAINTENANCE POLICY
This chapter introduces the basic concepts for the equipment maintenance.
The possibility of carrying out routine and corrective maintenance is based on the availability of:
First level maintenance consists of a set of simple operations by means of which a First Level
Maintenance Operator can acknowledge the state of the system and decide whether or not the
intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required in order to bring back the assembly
to optimum operating conditions by troubleshooting and unit replacement, if necessary. In this
philosophy:
First Level Maintenance Operator should not be authorized to change the equipment status;
he should be only authorized to display it or to make some simple tests through the Craft
Terminal, if expressly authorized by the Station Manager.
These actions are described in chapter 44 on page 421.
Second Level Maintenance Operator is authorized to make all actions necessary to repair
the system; moreover he should only be authorized to carry out routine maintenance.
These actions are described in chapter 45 on page 429.
With regard to the access to the Craft Terminal functionalities as well as to the TCO Suite
NEinteractive functionalities, notice that it is possible to use the following operator profiles:
The twostation layout typical of a radio link requires often that different operators can communicate
with each other to solve problems. The EOW functions of this equipment give a simple way for this
communication need.
This matter is described in chapter 42 on page 413.
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
409 / 592
detailed instructions on what to do and/or who must be contacted in the case should he find the
equipment not in its normal conditions.
and with the use of the Craft Terminal applications of the equipment this handbook refers to.
Without these prerequisites, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in
para.57.2.1 on page 569 is usually not enough to properly maintain equipment.
[2]
The troubleshooting procedure is carried out with the help of information reported in following
chapters. Anyway this method does not deal with the following issues (which are to be dealt with
otherwise):
The following interfaces are present on the equipment for troubleshooting purposes:
410 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
[3]
Usually, maintenance is firstly done via software (TMN or Local/Remote Craft Terminal or the TCO
Suite NEinteractive functionalities) to locate the faulty equipment and the faulty unit or the faulty
path and then on site to physically correct the trouble.
Maintenance can be done:
on site.
The operator is on site in case:
a)
b)
c)
d)
In cases a ) , b ), c ), the alarmed equipment is checked by means of the local Craft Terminal.
[4]
[5]
In the case of a MAJOR or MINOR alarm, after locating the alarmed unit, the alarm condition can
be attended by pressing the alarm storing push button on the front panel of the IDU MAIN unit.
This condition causes on the front coverplate:
red LEDs MINOR and MAJOR to turn off (free to accept other alarms)
If both LEDs are on, the Attend command should be given twice : one to attend the MINOR
alarm and one to attend the MAJOR alarm.
The troubleshooting operation is done by means of the Craft Terminal, and of the optical indicators
(LEDs) present on the NE.
The Craft Terminal is connected to the relative connector (F or Ethernet interface) on the front
coverplate of the IDU MAIN unit.
The Craft Terminal applications provide detailed information on the alarm state thus facilitating fault
location and subsequent removal as indicated in para. 45.8 on page 436.
To correctly execute the troubleshooting operations the technician must know the
equipment configuration (see Equipment applications on the Craft Terminal).
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
411 / 592
412 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
Connection diagram
1
4
7
*
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
#
OFF ON
STATION A
STATION B
ODU
ODU
IDU
IDU
MAIN UNIT
MAIN UNIT
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
OFF ON
Telephone handset
Telephone handset
N.B.
3
6
9
#
each Telephone handset has its own phone number. Phone number can be in the 10 to
99 range. Telephone handsets must have different phone numbers.
Physical connection on IDU: connect Telephone handsets RJ11 plug to TPH connector on the IDU
MAIN unit [ (7) in Fig. 21. on page 70 ].
b)
Set switch to FV
ON/OFF switch
RJ 11 connector
c)
MEANING
Engage line
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
413 / 592
or by Craft Terminal with the following menus (refer to para.23.4.3 on page 213 for details):
e)
f)
SELECTIVE:
OMNIBUS:
LEDs indication:
EOW (GREEN):
free line
EOW (YELLOW):
busy line
Flashing YELLOW:
received and recognized call
N.B.
position of green/yellow LED on IDU MAIN unit:
EOW
GREEN
GREEN
RED
RED
RED
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
42.2 Call Setup/End by Telephone handset connected to the IDU Main unit
a)
b)
c)
Check that line is free (EOWfree green LED on the MAIN unit is on)
Set Handset ON/OFF switch to ON
On keypad, press # to engage line
Check that EOWbusy yellow LED on the MAIN unit is on
On keypad, dial twodigit number of station to be called (or 00 for omnibus call)
Ring tone is audible in the handset, wait for answer
EOWbusy yellow LED on the MAIN unit flashes and audible tone is present
If not connected, connect handset to IDU, set ON/OFF switch to ON, press # on keypad, speak
On keypad, press *
Move handset ON/OFF switch to OFF
414 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
d)
43.1 Introduction
Please refer to chapter 41 on page 409 for an introduction to the basic concepts of equipment
maintenance.
This chapter describes the instruments, accessories and the equipment spare parts that are envisaged
to carry out the routine and corrective maintenance of the equipment, and and is organized as follows:
Software tools
herebelow
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
415 / 592
For the P/Ns of these Tool Kits, please see REF.[2] , [3] and [4] in Tab. 24. on page 96 .
a)
The Installation Tool Kit includes various types of common usage fixed spanners, standard and
crosshead screwdrivers, polygon spanners, polygon tube spanners, special fixed spanners, a torque
wrench, etc.
b)
The Maintenance Tool Kit is practically equal to the Station Tool Kit, with the addition of the
Antistatic wristband.
c)
The Station Tool Kit is a bag additionally containing various types of cables and cable adapters.
The detailed item list of these Tool Kits is given in Appendix F from page 563 :
N.B.
These Tool Kits are standardized kits for the use with all AlcatelLucent WTD equipment types:
they contain also items that are not used in 9400AWY environment (they are not described in
this manual).
Some special items are listed in Tab. 66. below, which gives also reference to figures where they are
depicted.
Tab. 66. Special items of the Tool Kits
SPECIAL ITEM
DESCRIPTION
416 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
When, in ODU configurations 1+1 with coupler, you must dismount and then mount one of the
two ODUs for maintenance purposes, the following operations:
UNBLOCK BEFORE DISMOUNT
One at a time, unblock the four ODU blocking levers (A) pushing up the restraint spring
(B) and, contemporarily, turning down the lever (C).
BLOCK AFTER MOUNT
Block the four ODU blocking levers (A)
may produce vibrations that could cause synch loss or other electrical disturbances to the other
ODU still working.
417 / 592
for ODUs with external diplexer: the TRANSCEIVER assembly. For the P/Ns refer to:
As a matter of fact, all other ODUrelated items listed in Chapter 14 on page 97 (but whose P/Ns are
given in the Installation Handbook) can be considered items to be provisioned as spare parts.
43.3.3 IDU Spare Parts
The set of spare parts for the IDU is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable
units. The suggested spare parts should be at least those containing electronic parts; in general the spare
part types are:
As a matter of fact, also passive items (whose P/Ns are given in the Installation Handbook) can be
considered items to be provisioned as spare parts.
a)
b)
In case a terminal has IDU Main and/or Extension units equipped with plugin(s), and you
order as spare parts such units separately from the plugin(s), take into account that, when
the IDU Main or Extension faulty unit must be replaced, the spare part box has first to be
opened, then the plugin must be installed, at last box must be closed.
Read important information regarding the spare Flash Card management in para.46.1
on page 465.
418 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them (e.g. gas);
if during transportation the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept,
make sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal
shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
419 / 592
420 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
TCO Suite and Craft Terminal commonly used functions for system status display and
checks, on page 423
GREEN
LED
ON (green)
Normal status
ON (if the ON/OFF switch is on)
Fig. 297. LEDs and pushbutton on IDU Extension unit for maintenance purposes
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
421 / 592
RED
RED
RED
RED
YELLOW
(10) Reset
LED on
Meaning
Action
Green LED ON
If off (and if the ON/OFF switch is on) there is a problem in the station
battery or in the MAIN unit
ACTION:
A
422 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
44.3 TCO Suite and Craft Terminal commonly used functions for system
status display and checks
This paragraph sums up how to use the TCO Suite and Craft Terminal functions for system status display
and checks to be carried out by a First Level Maintenance Operator.
N.B.
These operations should be done by the First Level Maintenance Operator only if expressly
authorized by the Station Manager, who, in his turn, for each 9400AWY NE that should be
accessible by the First Level Maintenance Operator must:
startup the TCO Suite Alarms & Settings function as explained in para.22.3.1 on page 156,
using:
2)
in the Alarms & Settings Main Menu screen that appears (Fig. 64. on page 157), click on button
Active Alarms
3)
4)
at the end, close the TCO Suite Alarms & Settings Active Alarms screen.
2)
the 9400AWY Main view opens (see Fig. 87. on page 181).
From this screen, according to the user profile assigned through the entered
Username/Password set, you can navigate to make some checks. Suggested checks are:
a)
Click on button
181183)
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
in the Main tool bar (see Fig. 87. and Fig. 88. on pages
423 / 592
3)
at the end:
424 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
b)
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
425 / 592
426 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
427 / 592
428 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
Warnings
on page 430, including:
EMC norms
Safety rules
on page 431
on page 432
on page 433
on page 434
on page 435
on page 436
on page 437
on page 439
on page 440
on page 442
on page 451
on page 460
on page 463
The handbook parts that should be read (or known) before starting this chapter are:
chapter 12 on page 37
chapter 13 on page 67
chapter 14 on page 97
chapter 41 on page 409
chapter 43 on page 415
chapter 44 on page 421
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
System overview
IDU provisioning and description
ODU provisioning, characteristics and description
Maintenance Policy
Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts
First Level Maintenance
429 / 592
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
51.4.3 ON PAGE 509
45.2.2 Safety rules
The Safety Rules stated in para.51.3 on page 502 describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety.
Please read them carefully before starting each action on the equipment.
SAFETY RULES
General
Carefully observe the frontpanel warning labels prior to working on optical
connections while the equipment is inservice.
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed
to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
Electrical safety
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by
48 V DC.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, lowvoltage,
lowimpedance, DC circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input
terminals.
45.2.3 Cautions to avoid equipment damage
Read carefully para.11.6 on page 36.
430 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
45.2 Warnings
Mechanical checks
Check that:
the units,
the cables,
[2]
Grounding check
Check that the racks, subracks, and modules are grounded (for 9400AWY shelves, see para.51.3.6
on page 506).
[3]
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by
48 V DC.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, lowvoltage,
lowimpedance, DC circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input
terminals.
Make these operations:
Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with screws, to guarantee
grounding (the rack is connected to the station ground).
[4]
Operative checks
Visual check:
During the normal operation, check the led normal condition, as specified in para.44.2
on page 421.
the commissioning tests, described in Chapter 32 on page 329, can be useful to carry
out equipment functional checks as a whole, in particular as far as checks on radio hop
are concerned.
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
431 / 592
Generally, a unit can be extracted from the system for the following reasons:
to restore the suspected faulty unit (after its successful replacement with a spare unit during
corrective maintenance) to verify that it is really faulty.
The extraction of a unit has always some consequences on system behavior and performance that the
Maintenance Operator must know in advance:
a)
the NE not to be supervised because the Equipment controller is installed in this unit.
b)
before extracting the unit make sure that the traffic is transmitted over channel 0 (on the
Extension unit). Otherwise, force with the CT the traffic onto channel 0.
Note:
before extracting the unit make sure that the traffic is transmitted over channel 1 (on the MAIN
unit). Otherwise, force with the CT the traffic onto channel 1.
432 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
ODU replacement
(para.45.11 page 460)
Fault repaired ?
Y
If possible, restore replaced unit in the system and perform
system check via Craft Terminal, to verify that is really faulty
N
Possible intermittent
failure
Fixed fault ?
Y
Restore spare part in the system and perform
system check via Craft Terminal
END
Fig. 305. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
433 / 592
when one of the alarm LEDs MAJ MIN on the MAIN unit front plate lights up.
remotely (in a TMN maintenance center) when the OS acknowledges the presence of problems in
the station.
When the local Operator decides to manage the problem, he should carry out the alarm attending
operation (see para. 45.6.2 below). This operation has the scope of notifying locally in the station and
remotely to the TMN maintenance center that a local operator is attending the problem.
the detected alarm condition can be stored through the Alarm attending pushbutton on the MAIN
unit.
This operation will turn OFF the LEDs MAJ / MIN and will light up the yellow LED ATTD on the MAIN
unit (Attended). The local Operator could also attend the alarm via the craft terminal.
a possible new alarm condition (following the Attending) will turn on the LEDs MAJ / MIN.
when the fault has been repaired, the yellow LED (if the alarm had been attended) or the red ones
(if the alarm had not been attended and no further alarms have occurred in the mean time) will turn
off.
434 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
N
END
MAJOR, MINOR,
LDI or RDI LED
on the MAIN unit
is ON
Y
Y
Login successful ?
Carry out procedure in
para.45.8 page 436
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
435 / 592
Refer to Fig. 305. on page 433, for the position of this step inside the corrective maintenance general
flowchart.
The ECT/RECT application includes several types of functions for system maintenance (used in
commissioning operations, too), as depicted in the following table:
FUNCTION
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Diagnosis
para.45.8.1 below
Alarm surveillance
Loopbacks
Tx mute functions
Performance Monitoring
BER measurement
Commissioning tests
For further information and operative procedures, refer to the Chapter 211 on page 277.
436 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
Look at the active alarms on the Control Panel always present on the window (which summarizes
all the NE alarms). Tab. 67. on page 438 describes the meanings of these alarms/statuses and its
respective maintenance actions.
b)
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
437 / 592
Mnemonic
Maintenance
CRI
Critical alarm
MAJ
Synthesis of alarms
troubleshooting. (N.B.)
MIN
WNG
Warning alarm
IND
Indeterminate alarm
EXT
External Point
(Housekeeping alarm)
EQP
Equipment alarm
TRS
Transmission alarm
COM
NE reachable/unreachable
SUP
Supervision state
ALI
Alignment
OS
Operation System
(see para.211.2 on page 279)
Abnormal Condition
NTP
AC
N.B.
that
needs
immediate
The Alarm Profile can modify the assignment of each alarm root to the various synthesis.
438 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
[2]
Select one node (or subnode) in the Resource Tree Area to check if some alarms are active.
[3]
[4]
If the node has subnodes put a tick in the Include alarms from subnodes field to display the
alarms active also in the subnodes.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
DESCRIPTION
Severity
Event time
Entity
Probable Cause
The information supplied helps the operator during the troubleshooting operations.
Tab. 69. on page 440 supplies general information on the alarm meanings and on the respective
maintenance actions to be done bases on the information given in the applications.
The maintenance action must take account of the board where the alarm is detected.
The Housekeeping alarms are referred to the input external point relevant to the Housekeeping signals.
They are available to the customer by connecting them to a dedicated subrack connector.
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
439 / 592
MEANING
MAINTENANCE ACTION
AIS
Communication problem
Battery fail
High BER
Excessive BER
Dem fail
Dem LOS
Cable LOS
Incompatible Frequency
Incompatible PTX
Internal Communication
Problem
LAN failure
LAN problem
Loss Of Frame
Loss Of Signal
Low BER
Check the
problem)
Mod fail
Mod LOS
440 / 592
tributary
link
connected
(propagation
link
connected
(propagation
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
Tab. 69. General issues of the alarm meanings and their respective maintenance actions
ALARM
Replaceable Unit Type
Mismatch
MEANING
MAINTENANCE ACTION
No RF received signal
Check the
problem)
Threshold Cross
Transmitter failure
Unconfigured Equipment
Present
Version Mismatch
Housekeeping
link
(propagation
45.8.3 Loopbacks
The loopbacks (settable by CT) give the possibility to perform some functional tests, thus making the fault
location and maintenance tests faster and easier. The loopbacks are explained in Chapter 210 on page
267.
45.8.4 Operators Controls of the protection switches
In certain troubleshooting conditions, changing the state of the protection switches can be useful to fix
problems.
For further information and operative procedures, refer to the Chapter 29 on page 257.
45.8.5 Tx mute function (local and remote)
This facility allows to switch off the transmitter. This facility can be useful during commissioning to avoid
producing interference if the frequency is not yet properly set.
For further information and operative procedures, refer to the Chapter 26 on page 233.
45.8.6 Performance Monitoring
The Performance Monitoring is responsible for quality events counting and reporting.
For further information and operative procedures, please refer to the Chapter 212 on page 289.
45.8.7 BER measurement
The BER measurement (noonintrusive) can be carried out as described in para.26.6 on page 246
45.8.8 Commissioning tests
In some cases, the commissioning tests, described in Chapter 32 on page 329, can be useful to carry out
equipment functional checks as a whole, in particular as far as checks on radio hop are concerned.
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
441 / 592
PC restart
Analog measurements
Loopbacks
Remote NE unreachable
on page 443
on page 444
on page 445
on page 445
on page 446
on page 447
on page 447
on page 449
on page 450
if possible, close the 1320CT application, after having verified that all NEs in the Network Element
Synthesis map are in not supervised state
N.B.
In the case this procedure is unsuccessful for successive NE login, carry out the checks
indicated in following paragraphs 45.9.1.2 (Ethernet interface usage) or 45.9.1.3 (F interface
usage), till paragraph 45.9.1.5 on page 445.
442 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
Verify that the CT Ethernet port is effectively that connected by a crossconnect cable to the MAIN
UNIT Ethernet interface on the left (see Fig. 76. on page 170; that on the right is not for CT interface).
Disconnect and then reconnect, at PC side, the Ethernet cable; this message should arise at
reconnection:
Otherwise:
the cable could not be the required crossconnect type (see Tab. 54. on page 144), or it could
be broken
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
443 / 592
Verify that the CT serial port is effectively that connected by cable to equipments F interface and that
cable is correctly connected.
In Windows, verify that the possible selection Start Programs Alcatel Lower Layers does
exist; if not, the installation and configuration of LLMAN and Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower
Layers (necessary for PCNE Finterface usage) has not been carried out: refer to Appendix C on
page 517 to know what to do.
at NE side through the TCO Suite Alarms & Settings function (see para.22.3.1 on page 156,
and para.22.3.9 on page 167).
With the Craft Terminal connected to the equipment Finterface, open the Alcatel Lower Layer
in the MSWindows
Manager screen (by clicking with the mouse pointer on the Alcatel symbol
menu bar, or by Start Programs Alcatel Lower Layers Lower Layers Manager, and
interpret the various fields of the screen that opens (Fig. 309. below) as described in the 1320CT
Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook (see Tab. 78. on page 571), chapter Software
Installation, paragraph Communication with NE.
Link led
If the Link led is red (i.e. OFF), the problem can be due to:
the cable
444 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
loggingout and then reloggingin Windows session, thus terminating all active applications
b)
or, if you do not want to close all applications, terminating manually all CT single processes by
TaskManager. The list of processes to be terminated is:
acdbm.exe
FTclient.exe
FTserver.exe
java.exe
LLman.exe
lss.exe
nesim.exe
nspd.exe
secim.exe
admctemlimosi.exe
dxcctemlimosi.exe
tsdsnmpemlim.exe
N.B.
pay attention not to terminate other processes !
push the RESET button on the MAIN unit and wait 10 minutes;
2)
if, after 10 minutes, the Craft Terminal application responds, open the Alarm status procedure
and proceed investigating the system state;
3)
if, after 10 minutes, the Craft Terminal application does not respond, replace the MAIN unit, as
indicated in para.45.10.1 on page 452.
4)
if the problem still persists after the MAIN unit has been replaced, the failure or content
corruption of the FLASH CARD must be suspected (a very extraordinary event); proceed with
its replacement, as indicated in para.46.2 on page 466.
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
445 / 592
In case of two CT connected to the NE, as shown in the figure below, and at the same time both open on
the menu Radio Power Meas, the analog measurements relevant to the PTx rem (Tx power of the
Remote NE) and the PRx rem (Rx power of the Remote NE) could have some instabilities (i.e. an
intermittent +99 dBm is reported for the PTx rem and 99 dBm is reported for the PRx rem).
ODU
ODU
Station B
IDU
Station A
IDU
45.9.4 Loopbacks
For a correct activation of every loopback (Loopback menu):
the relevant tributary must be enabled (Quick Configuration Procedures Step H point [1] on page
349 )
the local transmitter must be not muted (CT Menu Radio Configuration)
Note 1: The loopback will become active after 67 sec. approx. (24 sec. approx. for the RF loopback).
Note 2: The time for a new set is 10 to 25 sec. approx.
446 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
Wait for the automatic restarting of the Supervision (at the end of the fading conditions). The icon in
NES will become whole and the bullet will take the color relevant to the alarms (if any) active in the
NE.
If the Supervision does not start, close and open again the CT.
If the Supervision does not start, switch off and switch on the PC.
447 / 592
The abnormal condition list is a summary of the abnormal conditions currently active in the NE due to
manual operations such channel protection switching commands (Radio, HST Tx or Mux/Demux), Tx
muting, or any loopback (tributary, IDU, ODU).
Most of the manual operations listed in the abnormal conditions list may affect the traffic and the normal
working condition of the equipment
By CT Diagnosis Abnormal condition list
Press Refresh to actualize the list each time it is required.
448 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
In 1+1 configuration, Tx mute applied either on channel 1 or channel 0 will mute the two
channels transceivers at the same time.
The Tx Remote Mute automatically works (on and then off) only if performed on the
local NE (i.e. the NE to which the CT is connected). When a remote Tx mute is executed,
the EC changes the channel in monodirectional way, in order to have the possibility to send
the command to remove the mute. If the Network Element has been restarted after a
MUTE, there is no more possibility to setup the channel, because the remote address is
not known, and, any case, to setup the channel a bidirectional communication is needed.
The only way to remove the MUTE command is with local CT or from a remote CT which
can reach the Network Element through another supervisory interface.
Interferences investigation:
In order to verify that the local equipment is not receiving a foreign signal as a frequency interference,
Tx mute the remote station transceivers and check that the local current received level is < 95
dBm.
For additional information refer to the handbook Interference investigation procedure, which describes
in detail how to test the radio hop in order to find possible interferences.
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
449 / 592
In an 16E1+ Ethernet type configuration, operator may choose a 32 E1 frame structure capacity. In this
case, the relevant 17 to 32 tributaries bandwidth will be dedicated to the two User Ethernet ports
Nevertheless, tributaries 17 to 32 might show in the line interface CT view as well as in the Loopback
view. Since they do not physically exist, operator must ignore the lines dedicated to tributaries 17 to 32,
in the line interface view as well as in the loopback view.
450 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
b)
to check periodically the functionality of spare parts present in the spare part stock
to replace a faulty (or suspected faulty) unit with the correspondent spare part
to restore the suspected faulty unit (after its successful replacement with a spare unit during
corrective maintenance) to verify that it is really faulty.
Please refer to Fig. 305. on page 433 , for the position of this step inside the corrective maintenance
general flowchart.
Tab. 70. herebelow lists the specific procedures, according to the unit type. These procedures are
particularly detailed in order to:
PARAGRAPH
PAGE
45.10.1
452
45.10.2
456
Chapter 46
465
N.B.
All these procedures are based, for both 1+0 and 1+1 configurations, on the equipment
interconnection diagrams depicted in para.32.2 on pages 331 to 337 .
Please make reference to the equipment interconnection diagram corresponding to your
system actual layout.
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
451 / 592
ON/OFF switch
Flash Card label
Equipment Controller
Reset pushbutton
Flash Card
possible additional
identification label
of the upgrade kit
(see point [14]
on page 475)
Identification label
Fig. 313. Details for IDU MAIN unit or FLASH CARD replacement
General warnings:
Screw fixing
In all described operations, the screw tightening torque must be:
452 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
Procedure:
[1]
substep
operation by CT
[1]A
[1]B
[1]C
N.B.
in general, no
alarms/errors on both
NEs (N.B.)
in case Data plugin is present, this implies the loss of tributary Ethernet traffic on both
NEs, that cannot be avoided
[2]
If the local Craft Terminal is connected, perform the logoff, then switch it off
[3]
On the unit identification label present at unit rear side (see Fig. 313. on page 452) read the unit
Logistical Item (read also notes in point [14] on page 475, for the possible additional identification
label of the upgrade kit)
[4]
Get a spare unit with the same Logistical Item (see para.43.3.5 on page 419 for general cautions).
N.B.
If, according to the spare part policy described in para.43.3.3 point a ) on page 418 :
and the spare unit is not equipped with such plugin(s), that are instead available as
separate upgrade kits
you must at first install the spare plugin(s) into the spare IDU Main unit basic, as
described in para.47.1 on page 469 (obviously the described unit deinstallation and
reinstallation steps do not apply).
[5]
Disconnect following cables from the front panel of the IDU MAIN unit to be replaced, in the
recommended order:
tributaries cables
services cables
Notes:
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
453 / 592
Turn off the front panel power switch (position O, see Fig. 313. on page 452):
[7]
if possible, switch off the circuit breaker that gives power supply to the cable connected to the IDU
MAIN unit to be replaced.
[8]
Disconnect all remaining cables from the front panel of the IDU MAIN unit to be replaced, in the
recommended order:
IDUODU cable
only in case of 1+1 configurations: SCSI 1+1 interconnection cable between IDU Main and
Extension units
SAFETY RULES
If operation indicated in previous point [7] has not been carried out, a TNV2
(battery) voltage could be present on Station Battery input (cable side); do not
touch the pins when unplugged.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,
low-impedance, DC circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input
terminals.
[9]
Uninstall the IDU MAIN unit to be replaced and place it on the workbench
[10] Wear the antistatic protection armlet and connect its termination to a grounded structure (see
Fig. 1. on page 36).
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges
[11] Carry out the following operations on the IDU MAIN defective unit (see Fig. 313. on page 452):
[12] Carry out the following operations on the IDU MAIN spare unit (see Fig. 313. on page 452):
[13] Now you can take off the antistatic protection armlet
[14] Install the IDU MAIN spare unit
454 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
[6]
[15] Reconnect following cables to the front panel of the new IDU MAIN unit, exactly as they were
connected before the faulty unit was extracted, in the following order:
only in case of 1+1 configurations: SCSI 1+1 interconnection cable between IDU Main and
Extension units
IDUODU cable
CTNE cable
N.B.
[16] if switched off in step [7] on page 454, switch on the circuit breaker giving power supply to the cable
connected to the new IDU MAIN unit
[17] Turn on power on the new IDU MAIN unit (position I, see Fig. 313. on page 452)
[18] Wait for the unit configuration (about 2 minutes)
[19] Switch on CT, start 1320CT, login and enter NE supervision
[20] Additional operation for 1+1 configurations:
operation by CT
disable Force on CH0 Extensions RPS switch
Note:
the commands Force on Extensions TPS and EPS switches [set in previous steps [1]B
and [1]C on page 453] are lost due to the EC reset for IDU MAIN unit switch off/on
[21] Reconnect tributaries and services cables exactly as they were connected before the faulty unit was
extracted
[22] Check the system status using LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal
[23] If necessary, set TPS/RPS/EPS protection scheme as Revertive. Note that TPS and RPS protection
scheme setting to Revertive is not error free.
[24] Flash Card identifier label affixing
Please read para.13.7.2.2 on page 94.
If the inserted IDU MAIN spare unit has no Flash Card identifier label sticked on it or the label does
not match the flash card effectively inserted, put a label with the correct information (if not available,
create a label writing the information on a selfadhesive sticker).
End of IDU MAIN unit replacement procedure
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
455 / 592
ON/OFF switch
Identification label
456 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
Procedure:
[1]
Preliminary operations:
Before removing the IDU EXTENSION defective unit, by Craft Terminal carry out following
operations:
substep
operation by CT
results on services
[1]A
no alarms/errors on both
NEs
no alarms/errors on both
NEs
[1]B
no alarms/errors on both
NEs
no alarms/errors on both
NEs
[1]C
no alarms/errors on
remote NE
12 sec alarm/AIS
Sync Loss on local
NE
no alarms/errors on
remote NE
1 sec Slip or AIS on
local NE
[2]
On the unit identification label present at unit rear side (see Fig. 314. on page 456) read the unit
Logistical Item (read also notes in point [14] on page 475, for the possible additional identification
label of the upgrade kit)
[3]
Get a spare unit with the same Logistical Item (see para.43.3.5 on page 419 for general cautions).
N.B.
If, according to the spare part policy described in para.43.3.3 point a ) on page 418 :
and the spare unit is not equipped with such a plugin, that is instead available as
separate upgrade kit
you must at first install the spare plugin into the spare IDU Extension unit basic, as
described in para.47.1 on page 469 (obviously the described unit deinstallation and
reinstallation steps do not apply).
[4]
Disconnect following cables from the front panel of the IDU EXTENSION unit to be replaced in the
recommended order:
tributaries cables
services cables
Notes:
[5]
Turn off the front panel power switch (position O, see Fig. 314. on page 456):
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
457 / 592
if possible, switch off the circuit breaker that gives power supply to the cable connected to the IDU
EXTENSION unit to be replaced.
[7]
Disconnect all remaining cables from the front panel of the IDU EXTENSION unit to be replaced, in
the recommended order:
IDUODU cable
SCSI 1+1 interconnection cable between IDU Main and Extension units
[8]
[9]
[10] Reconnect the following cables to the front panel of the new IDU EXTENSION unit, exactly as they
were connected before the faulty unit was extracted, in the recommended order:
SCSI 1+1 interconnection cable between IDU Main and Extension units
IDUODU cable
[11] if switched off in step [6] on page 458, switch on the circuit breaker giving power supply to the cable
connected to the new IDU EXTENSION unit.
[12] Turn on power on the new IDU EXTENSION unit (position I, see Fig. 314. on page 456)
[13] Wait for the unit configuration (about 2 minutes)
458 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
[6]
operation by CT
no alarms/errors on
remote NE
12 sec
alarm/AISSync
Loss on local NE
results on services
no alarms/errors on
remote NE
1 sec Slip or AIS on
local NE
[14]A
[14]B
no alarms/errors on both
NEs
no alarms/errors on both
NEs
[14]C
no alarms/errors on both
NEs
no alarms/errors on both
NEs
[15] Reconnect tributaries and services cables exactly as they were connected before the faulty unit was
extracted
[16] Check the system status through LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal
End of IDU EXTENSION unit replacement procedure
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
459 / 592
b)
Get a spare ODU unit or, in case of ODU with external diplexer, a spare TRANSCEIVER box:
with the same Frequency Band and the same Frequency Shifter
[2]
[3]
CH1 (ODU connected to IDU MAIN unit), carry out steps [1]A to [1]C on page 453
CH0 (ODU connected to IDU EXTENSION unit), carry out steps [1]A to [1]C on page 457
Switch off the ODU by using the ON/OFF switch of the relevant IDU unit:
for channel 1, operate on MAIN unit (position O, see Fig. 313. on page 452 )
for channel 0, operate on EXTENSION unit (position O, see Fig. 314. on page 456 )
WARNING:
this avoids a possible unrecoverable unknown condition of the spare ODU, when
ODU will be switched on in next step [9]
460 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
[4]
If present, remove the solar shield (see Fig. 46. on page 120 and Fig. 47. on page 121)
[5]
[6]
in case of ODU configurations 1+1 with coupler, use lever shown in Fig. 296. on page 417;
b)
remove the faulty TRANSCEIVER box in the following way (refer to Fig. 47. on page 121):
1)
leave the BRANCHING box attached to antenna or coupler, i.e. do not open
levers (B)
2)
unblock the four levers (A) and separate gently the faulty TRANSCEIVER box from
the BRANCHING box
3)
verify the presence and correct positioning of the ORING on the spare
TRANSCEIVER box (see Fig. 49. on page 123)
5)
gently couple the spare TRANSCEIVER box on the BRANCHING box in the same
position you have verified in step 3 ) above
6)
fix the spare TRANSCEIVER box to the BRANCHING box using the four levers (A)
(refer to Fig. 47. on page 121)
[7]
[8]
If was present, mount the solar shield that was removed in previous step [4]
[9]
Switch on the ODU by using the ON/OFF switch (position I of the relevant IDU unit (MAIN or
EXTENSION unit) that has been switched off in previous step [3] .
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
461 / 592
CH1 (ODU connected to IDU MAIN unit), carry out following operations:
substep
operation by CT
[10]A
[10]B
[10]C
CH0 (ODU connected to IDU EXTENSION unit), carry out steps [14]A to [14]C on page
459
[11] If necessary, set TPS/RPS/EPS protection scheme as Revertive. Note that TPS and RPS protection
scheme setting to Revertive is not error free.
[12] Check the system status through LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
End of ODU replacement procedure
462 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
463 / 592
REPAIR FORM
Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to AlcatelLucent
CUSTOMER NAME
SITE
BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT
PRODUCT RELEASE
STATION/RACK
SUBRACK
SLOT
MNEMONIC
SERIAL NUMBER
FAULT PHASE
PRESUMED CAUSE
INSTALLATION /
TURN ON
CLEAR FAULT
DROP IN PERFORMANCE
OPERATION
INTERMITTENT FAULT
UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT
INTERNAL
LIGHTNING
EXTERNAL
MAINTENANCE
AIR COND.
TEMPERATURE FAULT
OTHER
DATE
NAME OF SENDER
COMMENTS
PROCESSING
NO FAULTS FOUND
FAULTS DETECTED
UPGRADE
SOLDERING /
WIRING
A
STANDARD REPAIRING
NOT REPAIRABLE
(REJECTED)
ADJUSTMENT
I
MECHANICAL
M
BD
COMPONENT
FL
PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARD
V1
P
DIRT
V1
V2
SUBSTITUTED
QUALITY ALERT
CORROSION
I
SX
OTHER
V3
COMMENTS
DATE
REPAIRING NUMBER
REPAIRING CENTRE
464 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
To replace a Flash Card with a different type, for system upgrade purpose, please refer to
para.47.3 Flash Card upgrade on page 479.
usable as specific spare part for a certain NE must contain the same SW information stored in the
Flash Card present in the NE:
SW committed version
b)
supplied as generic spare part, contains default SW information, stored by AlcatelLucent factory
for testing purposes before delivery to Customer. In this case you cannot insert it as it is in any NE,
without making specific operations by Craft Terminal. The same warning applies also for a Flash Card
supplied as specific spare part for a certain NE [see point a ) above], whenever the NE SW
information has been changed by Craft Terminal or by TMN system after the system installation
phase.
In both cases, it is expected that in the plant, the following backup information is always available for each
specific NE:
[1]
[2]
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
465 / 592
46.2.1 Introduction
The need for this replacement is for corrective maintenance purposes, whenever the failure or content
corruption of the Flash Card must be suspected
The Flash Card contains the system software (see para.12.5 on page 56). Many types are envisaged: its
identification is described in para.13.7.2.2 on page 94.
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid complete traffic loss)
Do not insert in the system a Flash Card the content of which you do not well know!
You must be aware that if a Flash Card with SW information different from that running in the system
is inserted as it is, the software download will be automatically carried out from the Flash Card
toward the Systems EC and RCs and Supervisory Units, thus causing a complete system crash.
The steps of the Flash Card replacement procedure to use, detailed in following para.46.2.2, depend on
the choice adopted by the Customer with reference to the type of spare flash card stored in the
sparepartstock (refer to the Spare Flash Card management policy described in para.46.1 on page
465):
a)
NEspecific spare part for a certain NE (each NE has its own specific spare Flash Card, kept
aligned to SW changes made on the NE in service, through an offline service station).
b)
466 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
Read the Flash Card Software Label on the label affixed on IDU MAIN unit (see Fig. 76. on page
170) and according to it, retrieve the Flash Card Logistical Item through Tab. 23. on page 93 .
If CT works, you can verify the Flash Card Software Label by Supervision SW Key (example
in Fig. 159. on page 256 )
[2]
Get the spare Flash Card with the same Logistical Item; leave it in its protective envelope until you
have worn the antistatic protection armlet
[3]
really specific for the NE where it must be inserted, by suitable documentation that should be
together with it. Proceed to next step [4]
or generic; in this case, before proceeding to next step [4] , isolate the NE from the supervision
network.
N.B.
[4]
Before to isolate the system from the supervision network, inform the supervision
center: if (from the supervision point of view), there are other NEs
cascadeconnected to it (and without supervision ring network) they will be isolated,
too.
Wear the antistatic protection armlet [see point b ) on page 36] and connect its termination to a
grounded structure
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges
[5]
Remove the Flash Card cover (see Fig. 313. on page 452 ). Store tidily cover and screws for their
successive mount
[6]
Extract the faulty Flash Card from the IDU Main Unit, verify again that its type is equal to that of the
spare Flash Card and insert the spare Flash Card (refer to Fig. 34. on page 94 for Flash Card profile
and insertion direction)
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
467 / 592
[8]
If you have inserted a generic spare Flash Card, carry out following checks and operations by CT:
1)
verify the SW COMMITTED and STANDBY versions in the Flash Card, as described in point
[2] on page 63 :
if the SW COMMITTED version is equal to that previously present with the replaced flash
card, proceed with substeps 2 ) and 3 ) below
if the SW COMMITTED version is not equal to that previously present with the replaced
flash card, but the STANDBY version is equal, proceed with the swap between the SW
COMMITTED and STANDBY versions, as described in para.48.5 on page 492 .
Then, proceed with substeps 2 ) and 3 ) below.
if neither the SW COMMITTED nor the STANDBY versions are equal to that previously
present with the replaced flash card, proceed with downloading and activation of the target
SWP version, as described in chapter 48 on page 485 .
Then, proceed with substeps 2 ) and 3 ) below.
2)
launch the TCO Suite SetUp Tool , as described in para.32.3.9 on page 345
In the screen of Fig. 244. on page 346 , click on button Open Configuration .
When the file selection window opens requiring a configuration_name.qcml file to be opened,
specify the NEs specific file [mentioned in point [2] on page 465 ].
The window in Fig. 245. on page 347 will appear.
Then, clicking repeatedly on Next buttons (without any other actions, or just checking
configuration screens, if you like), reach Step L on page 368 and click on Finish button.
In this way the .qcml configuration data are loaded in the Flash Card data base.
3)
carry out MIB data restore and activation [using NEs specific MIB backup file mentioned in
point [1] on page 465 ] as shown in MIB Restore in Fig. 209. on page 301 (from operative
point of view, refer to para.28.3.2 and 28.3.3 on page 255). In alternative to activation by
SW, carry out the Equipment Controller HW Reset, pushing the suitable button on IDU MAIN
Unit (see Fig. 76. on page 170).
Now, you can reconnect the NE to the supervision network, and proceed with following step [9]
[9]
[10] Now you can take off the antistatic protection armlet
[11] Carry out functional checks by Craft Terminal.
End of procedure
468 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
[7]
upgrade 9400AWY system from 1+0 to 1+1 configuration, para.47.2 on page 476
install a new Flash Card to improve system capacity, para.47.3 on page 479
Description
Notes
in alternative
Notice that:
in 1+0 configuration, you can equip any of the plugin types into the IDU Main unit
in 1+1 configuration, you can upgrade the system in one of the following ways:
upgrade from max 16 to max 32 E1 tributaries: you must install the 1732 E1 PLUGIN into both
the:
upgrade to Ethernet tributaries: you must install the DATA ENHANCED ON SITE UPGRADE
KIT into the IDU Main unit only
upgrade for AUDIO + USER SERVICE CHANNEL functionalities: you must install the AUDIO
+ USER SERVICE CHANNEL UPGRADE KIT into the IDU Main unit only.
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
469 / 592
Drawings used to show operations are relevant to the IDU Main unit. Operations to be carried
out for IDU Extension unit are exactly the same.
Screw fixing
In all described operations, the screw tightening torque must be:
Isolate the power supply, disconnect Craft Terminal [see point f ) on page 36] and disconnect all
cables.
[2]
[3]
Fig. 316. :
if present, dismount both fixing brackets (A and B), there are two screws for each (C)
undo the side screws D (three on each side) for cover unfix
B
D
Fig. 316. Dismounting the fixing brackets and cover unfix
470 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
47.1.2 Procedure
[4]
Rotating the removed fixing brackets into both the suitable covers side holes, slide the box cover
out from the box base, as shown in Fig. 317. :
Wear the antistatic protection armlet and connect its termination to a grounded structure (see
Fig. 1. on page 36).
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
471 / 592
[6]
Fig. 319. : according to the plugin to be installed, dismount the metal plate (fixed by two screws)
which closes the plugin devoted hole. Take the two removed screws for their fixing.
plate to remove for
AUDIO + USER SERVICE
CHANNEL plugin
472 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
Fig. 320. shows in details the connectors and columns for plugin fixing by screws
[8]
Insert the plugin in its connector(s) depicted in previous Fig. 320. , and fix it:
on the PCB using the 2 or 3 screws on the suitable columns depicted in previous Fig. 320.
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
473 / 592
474 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
if the upgrade kit is supplied with a suitable selfadhesive label (under study), stick it just on side
of that already existing
otherwise create a label writing the upgrade kit P/N on a selfadhesive sticker, and stick it just
on side of that already existing.
additional
identification label
of the upgrade kit
existing
identification label
of the basic unit
system cabling (it is different from that previous to upgrading). Refer to the Installation
Handbook, according to the new hardware configuration
system data redefinition (it is different from that previous to upgrading), carrying out Quick
Configuration procedure by Craft Terminal (details in para.32.3.7 on page 343).
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
475 / 592
47.2.1 Preface
This upgrade must be done on both stations of the radio link, first on one, then on the other, or at the same
time by two different service teams. A third phase is necessary for the radio link lineup.
a)
the 1+0 configuration (starting configuration), already equipped with the E1 Protection box
and the Services Protection box . Please make reference to the equipment interconnection
diagram corresponding to your actual system layout.
b)
N.B.
Operations by Craft Terminal on each station must be done by local ECT through F or Ethernet
interface only, while the use of RECT is not admitted.
476 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
47.2.2 Procedure
[1]
For both stations, ascertain to have all materials necessary for the HW upgrade, at IDU and ODU
levels, as well as necessary installation materials.
For materials necessary for hardware upgrade, please refer to the:
Installation Handbook (ODU provisioning and additional installation materials for IDU and
ODU)
PHASE [A] : OPERATIONS ON FIRST STATION
[2]
Preliminary operations to be done only in case of 1+0 system not equipped with the Protection
boxes:
a)
switch off the IDU MAIN unit and disconnect all tributary (with the exception of Ethernet, if any)
and services cables from its front panel
b)
connect the IDU MAIN and EXTENSION units to the E1 Protection box and the Services
Protection box
connect the E1 Protection box and the Services Protection box to the station DDF
c)
switch on the IDU MAIN unit, connect the Craft Terminal, switch it on, start 1320CT and login
the NE (details in para.22.5.2 on page 173) and verify the link functionality
[3]
If not connected, connect the Craft Terminal, switch it on, start 1320CT and login the NE (details in
para.22.5.2 on page 173)
[4]
Using the instructions given in the Installation Handbook , install the second ODU; for general
information, make reference to Fig. 4. on page 41). Warning: in case of 1+1 ODU configuration:
[5]
a)
with two antennas, install the second ODU with its own antenna
b)
if the coupler is already installed, fix the second ODU to the coupler, then go to step [5]
if the coupler is not installed, carry out following operations (full link unavailability from
substep 3 ) till substep 6 ):
1)
by Craft Terminal, disable ATPC on CH1 (if enabled): see para.26.4.1 on page
239
2)
3)
4)
disconnect ODU CH1 from antenna, connect the 1+1 coupler to the antenna, and
connect the ODU CH1 to the 1+1 coupler
5)
6)
wait until system restart completion, then start 1320CT and login the NE (details in
para.22.5.2 on page 173)
7)
by Craft Terminal, enable ATPC on CH1 (if necessary): see para.26.4.1 on page 239
Only in case of 1+0 system already equipped with the Protection boxes: install the CH0 IDU
EXTENSION unit and connect it to the E1 Protection box and the Services Protection box, using
the instructions given in the Installation Handbook
N.B.
connect its power supply plug to the station battery, but ascertain that its ON/OFF switch
is in OFF position and leave it in OFF position till step [9]
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
477 / 592
Connect the 100pin cable to both IDU MAIN and EXTENSION units, using the instructions given
in the Installation Handbook
[7]
Connect the IDUODU cable (between the CH0 Extension IDU and the second ODU), using the
instructions given in the Installation Handbook
[8]
[9]
1)
2)
This configuration change causes the JUSM loss, so that you must login again the NE (details
in para.22.5.2 from page 173)
3)
Set EPS (Mux/Demux Protection) Lockout: see para.29.1 subpara.29.1.2 on page 259
WARNING: this operation is not error free
4)
Set CH0 Tx Power as follows: with reference to Fig. 140. on page 238 :
select Channel #0 click on RTPC & ATPC insert value in Tx Power(dBm) field Apply
WARNING: the CH0 Rx remains at 0 till the NE restart carried out in substep [10]4 ) below
5)
Note: this step is not necessary in HSB configuration, where frequency is set automatically:
Set CH0 Tx Frequency as follows: with reference to Fig. 136. on page 235 :
select Channel #0 click on Frequency insert value in Tx Frequency(kHz) field Apply
Set CH0 Frequency Shifter as follows: with reference to Fig. 136. on page 235 :
select Channel #0 insert value in Shifter field Apply
2)
3)
Remove EPS (Mux/Demux Protection) Lockout: see para.29.1 subpara.29.1.2 on page 259
WARNING: this operation is not error free
4)
[11] Repeat the previous steps in the other station of the radio link
PHASE [C] : OPERATIONS ON THE LINK
N.B.
These operations are meant for the radio link as a whole, and imply full link unavailability.
[12] In case of ODU configuration with two antennas, carry out the alignment of the second ODU antenna
(N.B.)
[13] Carry out the CH0 functionality test (N.B.).
N.B.
For details on commissioning procedures, please refer to the Chapter 32 on page 329.
PHASE [D] : NE DATA SAVE
478 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
[6]
To replace a Flash Card with the same type, for maintenance purpose, please refer to
para.46.2 Flash Card replacement procedures on page 466.
In general, the Flash Card upgrade must be done together with HW changes, e.g. changing the system
capacity from 16xE1 to 32xE1 requires to:
change:
the existing Flash Card 32Mb 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD with the 64Mb 16 QAM FLASH
CARD
corresponding to the change of the:
and install (if not yet present) the 1732xE1 PLUGIN in the IDU MAIN UNIT, as well in the IDU
EXTENSION UNIT in case of 1+1 systems; to carry out this operation, please refer to para.47.1
Installation of plugins on page 469.
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
479 / 592
This example is for changing the existing Flash Card 16E1/32Mbps DATA 4/16QAM with the 32E1DS1
4/16QAM. Adapt it to the actual change you must do.
Tab. 72. Flash card upgrade carried out by one operator only for both stations
STEP 2 IN STATION A
(in series to step1)
STEP 1 IN STATION B
Current configuration Backup
idem
idem
idem
idem
idem
idem
notes
Reopening USM
Go to STATION A and carry out operations
detailed in column STEP 2
Open Local and Remote USM
CHANGE
REMOTE
CONFIG
BY
SYSTEM SETTING FROM 16E1 TO 32E1
the traffic is
CAPACITY
impacted for
CHANGE LOCAL CONFIG BY SYSTEM about 1 min
SETTING FROM 16E1 TO 32E1
CAPACITY
Following paragraphs are given just for Operators who need to know what to do in detail for:
480 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
of the type consistent with the equipment configuration he wants: see Tab. 23. on page 93 ,
N.B.
with the same SWPversion present in the 9400AWY system to be upgraded, already present
in the FlashCards SW committed version bank
with the same NE network routing data (and other configuration data) of the system to be
upgraded (for this purpose, Customer can save the NEs .qcml configuration file on
floppydisk as explained in the Procedure for .qcml file backup on page 65 , and give it to
AlcatelLucent Factory). N.B.
with the same MIB of the system to be upgraded (for this purpose, Customer can save the MIB
on floppydisk as explained in chapter 214 on page 301 and give it to AlcatelLucent Factory).
N.B.
these options could be subject to possible special contractual terms.
To install a new Flash Card fully configured in factory carry out operations in para.47.3.4 on page 482.
To install a new Flash Card not configured in factory carry out operations in para.47.3.5 on page 483.
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
481 / 592
General warnings:
Screw fixing
In all described operations, the screw tightening torque must be:
get the new Flash Card; leave it in its protective envelope until you have worn the antistatic protection
armlet
[2]
wear the antistatic protection armlet [see point b ) on page 36 ] and connect its termination to a
grounded structure
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges
[3]
remove the Flash Card cover (see Fig. 313. on page 452 ). Store tidily cover and screws for their
successive mount
[4]
extract the old Flash Card from the IDU Main Unit and insert the new one (refer to Fig. 34. on page
94 for Flash Card profile and insertion direction)
[5]
carry out the Equipment Controller HW Reset, pushing the suitable button on IDU MAIN Unit (see
Fig. 313. on page 452 ).
About two minutes are necessary for the supervision process to get data from the new flash card.
[6]
restore the Flash Card cover removed in step [3] above (screw tightening torque as specified above)
[7]
[8]
if not connected, connect the Craft Terminal, switch it on, start 1320CT and login the NE (details in
para.22.5.2 on page 173)
[9]
carry out the Quick Configuration procedure (interactive) by Craft Terminal [details in para.32.3.7
on page 343 ], to change the system capacity
482 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
get the new Flash Card; leave it in its protective envelope until you have worn the antistatic protection
armlet
[2]
if not connected, connect the Craft Terminal, switch it on, start 1320CT and login the NE (details in
para.22.5.2 on page 173)
[3]
by Craft Terminal:
1)
run the Quick Configuration procedure (interactive) by Craft Terminal [details in para.32.3.7
on page 343 ]. In the last screen (Step L on page 368) click on Save As button: configuration
data are saved in a configuration_name.qcml file
2)
save the MIB data as shown in MIB BackUp in Fig. 209. on page 301 (from operative point of
view, refer to para.28.3.1 on page 254)
[4]
[5]
[6]
Before to isolate the system from the supervision network, inform the supervision center:
if (from the supervision point of view), there are other NEs cascadeconnected to it (and
without supervision ring network) they will be isolated, too.
wear the antistatic protection armlet [see point b ) on page 36 ] and connect its termination to a
grounded structure
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges
[7]
remove the Flash Card cover (see Fig. 313. on page 452 ). Store tidily cover and screws for their
successive mount
[8]
extract the old Flash Card from the IDU Main Unit and insert the new one (refer to Fig. 34. on page
94 for Flash Card profile and insertion direction)
[9]
restore the Flash Card cover removed in step [7] above (screw tightening torque as specified above)
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
483 / 592
verify the SW COMMITTED version in the Flash Card, as described in point [2] on page 63.
If not V2.1.0, proceed with V2.1.0 downloading and activation, as described in chapter 48 on
page 485.
2)
launch the TCO Suite SetUp Tool , as described in para.32.3.9 on page 345.
In the screen of Fig. 244. on page 346 , click on button Open Configuration .
When the file selection window opens requiring a configuration_name.qcml file to be opened,
specify the NEs specific file you have saved in previous step [3]1 ) on page 483.
The window in Fig. 245. on page 347 will appear.
Then, clicking repeatedly on Next buttons (without any other actions, or just checking
configuration screens, if you like), reach Step L on page 368 and click on Finish button.
In this way the .qcml configuration data are loaded in the Flash Card data base.
3)
carry out MIB data restore and activation [using NEs specific MIB backup file you have saved
in previous step [3]2 ) on page 483] as shown in MIB Restore in Fig. 209. on page 301 (from
operative point of view, refer to para.28.3.2 and 28.3.3 on page 255). In alternative to
activation by SW, carry out the Equipment Controller HW Reset, pushing the suitable button
on IDU MAIN Unit (see Fig. 76. on page 170).
In this way the MIB configuration data are loaded in the Flash Card data base.
About two minutes are necessary for the supervision process to get data from the new flash
card.
[12] carry out the Quick Configuration procedure (interactive) by Craft Terminal [details in para.32.3.7
on page 343 ], to change the system capacity
[13] connect the system to the supervision network
[14] carry out functional checks by Craft Terminal
[15] save NE data as explained in para.12.6.8 on page 65.
[16] as the new Flash Card is supplied with a selfadhesive label containing the Flash Card Software
Label, get and stick it over the older one [see (A) in Fig. 21. on page 70 ); (N.B. if possible, remove
the older selfadhesive label before sticking the newer).
N.B.
In alternative, if an offline IDU MAIN unit is available at Customer premises, the Flash Card
can be prepared on it, and then installed on the target system as described in previous
para.47.3.4 on page 482.
End of procedure
484 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
[10] now you can take off the antistatic protection armlet
Before starting this procedure, it is suggested to give a look to para.12.6 on page 58.
N.B.
Procedures described in this chapter are carried out with the PC connected to the NE.
48.1 Requirements
48.1.1 Craft Terminal
The PC, already loaded with the SWP to be downloaded toward the NE (as explained in previous chapter
31 on page 309) must be available as CT (Craft Terminal).
48.1.2 NE state
[1]
[2]
Equipment state
equipment must have been previously installed, cabled, powered on and commissioned as
described in para.12.6.1 on page 59
the SWPversion present inside the NEs Flash Card must be lower than that of the ECT (refer
to para.12.6.3 on page 62 to know how to compare them).
Equipment HW constraints
None
In addition to skills stated in para.31.1.2 on page 310, the Operator must be familiar with all the
equipment functionalities.
b)
The Operators profile must be Administrator or craftPerson (see para.23.6 on page 214).
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
485 / 592
WARNING:
this procedure describes the operations to be done on a single NE. You must be aware
that they must be done on both stations A and B of the radio link. For this purpose, make
reference to Chapter 49 on page 495
para.48.3 herebelow
b)
c)
d)
e)
MIB save
Step 2.
Carry out following operations (for details refer to para.22.5.2 on page 173):
a)
b)
Startup the Craft Terminal and wait for the Network Element Synthesis screen
c)
Carry out Start supervision and Show Equipment on the Network Element that must be
affected by this download operation
d)
Login the Network Element, using the Administrator or craftPerson UserName &
Password
e)
Check SWP versions 2.1.x present in the NE MIB banks, as explained in point [2] on page 63.
You must be aware that the SWP download, carried out in the following, will overwrite the current
Standby version. In the case you want to maintain such a version, and overwriting the other (i.e.
that presently Committed), activate the current Standby version as described in para.48.5 on
page 492.
Step 3.
Check the SWP version 2.1.y (y > x) availability for download to the NE, as explained in step
6 ) on page 325.
If not available, carry out completely the procedure described in para.31.8 on page 321.
Verify also that the version to be downloaded is greater than those present in both the NE MIB
current Standby and Committed banks.
486 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
c)
The screen of Fig. 323. on page 488 appears, with empty fields. Click on Use System
Default button.
In this way the systems sets automatically the Address and Port fields, that depend on
how the login to the NE has been done:
by LAN interface: IP address of the PC to download the software in LAN mode is set
N.B.
The UserId and Password present in this screen are relevant to the ftp login, are
set automatically with the Use System Default button and have no relationship
with those necessary for the NE login.
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
487 / 592
488 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
Step 2.
SW Download
a)
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
489 / 592
Now select a specific SWP to download on the NE, and press Init download to start it.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
c)
2_1_
1
2_1_1
e)
f)
N.B.
The software download lasts about 1/2 hour if performed through the F interface, and
few minutes if the Ethernet interface is used.
490 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
g)
V02.01.01
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
491 / 592
After the software download (explained in previous para.48.4 on page 487), two software packages are
present in the NE: one Committed and the other Stand by.
The Activation of the new Software Package on the NE means to make the Stand by SWP become the
Committed one (and viceversa).
Step 1.
Stand by SW activation
a)
Fig. 327. below: select the Standby SW (1), set Activation (2) in the Software
Management Action field, then Apply Action (3)
(1)
V02.01.01
(2)
V02.01.01
(3)
492 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
c)
d)
e)
Step 2.
Logoff the NE
b)
Login the NE and verify, by SW Download SW Status (see Fig. 326. on page 492), that
the SW banks have changed their Current Status.
WARNING:
once you have downloaded and made active the new SWP in NE environment, do not
make the mistake of trying to switch the previos version back to COMMITTED status (for
details, read WARNING on page 495 ).
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
493 / 592
Proceed as follows:
After having carrying out for the first time:
the V2.1.1 SW download to the NE (para.48.4 on page 487), but, in phase c ) on page 490,
setting Forced before clicking on Init download (Fig. 328. below)
2_1_1
(1)
(2)
Fig. 328. Forced Init download
N.B.
and the activation of the Stand by V2.1.1 on the NE (para.48.5 on page 492)
Obviously, at the end of this procedure, you will have both SW banks with V2.1.1 SWP, and the
V2.1.0 SWP has been lost.
with the first step (normal download procedure) all SW components known by previous SWP
version are downloaded on flash card;
new SWP component is known ONLY by SWP 2.1.1, so after the activation of package SWP
2.1.1, it is necessary to download SWP 2.1.1 again (IN FORCED MODE), to transfer the new
SW component image onto flash card.
494 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
both ECT and equipment (in both stations A and B) are presently running with version V2.1.0
the new SWP V2.1.1 is delivered to Customer by means of the specific SWP CDROM.
Procedure:
[1]
if the former version of 2xFast Ethernet plugin is equipped, it must be removed, and, if
envisaged, the new version of 4xGbit Ethernet plugin must be installed; for this purpose, carry
out these operations on both stations:
a)
b)
c)
and, if envisaged, install the DATA ENHANCED ON SITE UPGRADE KIT, making
reference to para.47.1 on page 469 of this manual
N.B.
ignore the unespected equipment alarm that arises after the installation of the
4xGbit Ethernet plugin (it is not supported by SWP version V2.1.0)
2)
check that no hardware or radio transmission problems are present (with exception of the
unespected equipment alarm stated above). Otherwise, solve them before starting upgrade
3)
close all Performance Monitoring, analog measurement and BER measurement processes, if
any
4)
remove all loopbacks as well as all lockout, forced and manual commands on protection
schemes, if any
5)
do not use functions stated above, or any other action not strictly necessary for the upgrade,
until you have completed the SW upgrade of both stations, i.e. not before step [5] on page
496 of this procedure.
6)
WARNING:
you must be aware that, once you have downloaded and made active the new SWP V2.1.1 in
NE environment (at the end of step [3] for station A , and at the end of step [4] for station B),
you cannot switch them back to V2.1.0, because there is no backward compatibility between
V2.1.1 and V2.1.0 NE data base structures.
In case you think you could need to go back to V2.1.0, before next step [2] , i.e. with SWP 2.1.0
running both in PC and NE, prepare a spare Flash Card containing:
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
495 / 592
2)
on local PC, carry out the installation of the new SWP version in the ECT environment and the
V2.1.1 NE software downloading preparation, as indicated in Chapter 31 from page 309 to
page 325
N.B.
[3]
The Craft Terminal configuration (para.31.9.1 on page 326 ) and the EML
construction (para.31.10 on page 327 ) are not considered necessary because
relevant data should have already been defined during the CT installation made with
SWP 2.1.0.
connect the CT to the local NE (station A) by the suitable crossconnct Ethernet cable, launch
the V2.1.1 Craft Terminal and login the local NE (station A) by:
TCO Suite Main Menu Operational & Maintenance
4)
[4]
activation of the new Software Package on the NE, para.48.5 on page 492
[5]
carry out the download (from the CT) and the activation of the new SWP version in the NE
environment, executing in sequence the operations described in:
by RECT functionality, login the remote NE (station B) and carry out same operations made
for station A
[6]
496 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
[2]
manually, with the Control Panel of WINDOWS NT or WINDOWS 2000/XP when the CDROM
containing the relevant Software product is not available.
Practically, the manual deinstallation of the installed SW components must be done in the opposite
sequence by which they were installed by the automatic installation process.
Manual procedure
N.B.
Before starting this procedure, check that no SW components (or subprocesses) are
active; in case of doubts, restart the PC (switch it off / on).
From Control Panel select Add/Remove Programs and deinstall the components in the following
order:
1)
2)
ALCATEL JUSM Help On Line (for all versions you like to remove)
3)
4)
ALCATEL Radio Common JUSM (for all versions you like to remove)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
497 / 592
a)
END OF SECTION 4
498 / 592
USER MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND UPGRADE
SECTION 5: APPENDICES
SECTION CONTENT
PAGE
501
511
517
547
553
563
567
575
589
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
499 / 592
500 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
herebelow
Safety Rules
General Rules
Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
Dangerous Electrical Voltages
Risks of Explosions
Moving Mechanical Parts
Equipment connection to earth
Heatradiating Mechanical Parts
Microwave radiations (EMF norms)
Specific safety rules in this handbook
on page 502
on page 503
on page 504
on page 505
on page 505
on page 506
on page 506
on page 507
on page 508
on page 509 including:
on page 509
on page 509
on page 509
on page 510
on page 510
on page 510
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
501 / 592
Before carrying out any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance operations
carefully read the related parts of this Manual or other Handbooks, in particular:
When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment
parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools
In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating
this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical
assistance is meant :
personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be
aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary
measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others.
The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified
is not permitted.
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong
exclusively to the service personnel.
For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings,
inscriptions ect.
The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,
i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and
statement:
SAFETY RULES
502 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
CONTAINS A SYMBOL
INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUNDBLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standardknown
symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common
ones, specifically:
risk of explosion
microwave radiations
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
The symbols presented in para.51.3.3 through 51.3.8 are all the possible symbols that
could be present on AlcatelLucent equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the
equipment this handbook refers to.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
503 / 592
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equipment
will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING !
Ground protect the equipment before connecting it to the mains
Make sure that power has been cut off before
disconnecting ground protection.
Personal injury can be caused by 48 V DC. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed
part of your body.
b)
Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, DC circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in
burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
504 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow
(batteryemitted hydrogen). A 417IEC5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the
openings must not be covered up.
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been
stopped.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
505 / 592
Terminals for equipment connection to earth , to be done according to international safety standards, are
pointed out by the suitable symbol:
terminal
symbol
The position of earth connection terminals is specified in the equipment Installation Handbook.
Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of
your body.
506 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
The site must be compliant with ICNIRP guidelines or local regulation if more restrictive.
Non authorized persons should not enter the compliance boundaries, if any, for the general
public.
Compliance RF boundaries, if any, related to Electro Magnetic Field exposure must be marked.
Workers should be allowed to switchoff the power if they have to operate inside compliance
boundaries.
Install the antenna as high as possible from floor or area with public access ( if possible the
cylinder delimitating the compliance boundaries, if any, or the cylinder corresponding to the
transmission area directly in front of antenna with the same diameter as the antenna, more than
2 meters high).
Install the antenna as far as possible from other existing equipment emitting RF power.
Anyway remind that someone standing in front of the 9400AWY antenna may cause traffic
shutdown.
EMF emission
warning sign
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
507 / 592
Tab. 73. Compliance boundaries for 9400AWY transceivers with 1ft (30 cm) antenna:
B
System
Modulation
Worst Configuration
A (m)
B (m)
4 QAM
0,4
2,63
4 QAM
0,4
0,55
4 QAM
0,4
0,71
Antenna configurations:
a ) 1+0 with 1ft. integrated antenna
b ) 1+1 HSB with coupler and 1ft. integrated antenna
c ) Configuration with separated 1ft. antenna
51.3.9 Specific safety rules in this Manual
Specific safety rules are specified in the following parts:
chapter 45 :
508 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
Compliance boundaries:
Before carrying out any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance operations
carefully read the related parts of this Manual or other Handbooks, in particular:
The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook
by the symbol and term:
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this Manual or in the relevant Plant Documentation,
or those specified in the CustomersInstallation Norms. (or similar documents)
Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
Install filters outside the equipment as required
Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance
Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and decrease it.
Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.
Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
509 / 592
Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated
the maintenance and monitoring operations.
Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning
labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.
Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of (see Fig. 1. on page 36):
a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.
para.13.2 on page 69
para.14.2 on page 99
510 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
click
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
511 / 592
512 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
click
Generally speaking, as soon as the browser is allowed to execute Java applets inside the HTML page,
a specific dialog will appear when browser recognizes that Java applets are inside the page.
As usual, both language and graphical layout could vary with respect to browser, operating system
version, operating system and browser languages and so on. Following Fig. 332. and Fig. 333. show a
couple of examples of this warnings: as wrote before, things can differ with respect to language or graphics
and so on.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
513 / 592
514 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
This request is necessarily shown because TCO Suite applets needs specific parameters and permissions
in order to perform requested operations (reading and writing of files, for example). Applets used are
authenticated and a certificate is used to sign applets in order to tell user (and browser) that someone
(AlcatelLucent Italia SpA, WTD R&D Software CC, in this case) guarantees about the safety in loading
those applets inside a browser. Other examples could be more similar to the one shown in Fig. 334. below,
usually with JREs with version number 1.4:
Another difference that user could perceive is related to a missing JRE but, even in this case, the graphical
layout will differ from system and browser.
If user opens the Start.html page even without a JRE installed shown page would differ from browser
and system versions. Following Fig. 336. shows a Mozilla Firefox browser with no JRE installed. On top
of browser a yellow alert bar can be seen: in this case the browser detected a special content for which
it has no plugin so the browser asks the user to automatically install needed plugin by searching it on
the Internet.
515 / 592
516 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
Since this operations is specifically related to Mozilla Firefox browser, some details could be different with
respect to used version. Anyway, since this operation is automatically managed by the browser no control
can be made through TCO Suite. Using this procedure will usually install the latest JRE version available
as Mozilla Firefox plugin that is usually newer than the JRE 1.4.2_12 available within the TCO Suite.
Carrying out this procedure is not necessary if you want to use TCO Suite and Craft Terminal
functions, accessing the NE through its Ethernet interface only.
WARNING:
the LLMAN installation (step [3] on page 518 ) must always be performed before the
1320CT Package Installation (step [4] on page 518 ) . Installing the 1320CT Package
before the LLMAN may result in unproper working. If you have installed the 1320CT
Package without having installed before LLMAN, and after you want to install LLMAN, you
must:
install LLMAN and, after, the 1320CT Package, as described in this Appendix.
Procedure:
[1]
Installation startup
1)
2)
The TCO Suite startup begins. Please refer to para.22.2.3 on page 148 for the procedure
execution (in particular for JRE Package automatic installation) and the management of special
conditions that could occur
3)
At the end of the TCO Suite startup, the CDROM TCO Suite Main Menu screen appears
(Fig. 339. below); click on Advanced Settings button
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
517 / 592
After a while, the CDROM TCO Suite Advanced Settings screen appears (Fig. 340. below)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
4)
In the CDROM TCO Suite Advanced Settings screen (Fig. 340. on page 518 ) click on button Java
JRE Package Installation . Please refer to para.22.2.5.1 on page 152 for details.
N.B.
as a matter of fact, the JRE Package Installation should have already been done in step
[1] 2 ) on page 517
[3]
Install LLMAN (Alcatel Lower Layers Manager), as described in para.53.2 from page 519
[4]
Carry out the 1320CT Package Installation (installation in PC of SWP components from the SWP
CDROM): see para.31.5 on page 314 , taking into account that , when you reach para.31.5.3
on page 317 (Next step) you must come back here to execute steps from [5] below
[5]
Install and configure Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers, as described in para.53.3
from page 522 (different subprocedures, according to the PC Operating System)
[6]
Complete the Craft Terminal setup carrying out the following phases:
1)
2)
3)
4)
CT initial configuration:
para.31.9 on page 326
5)
EML construction:
para.31.10 on page 327
END OF PROCEDURE
518 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
In the CDROM TCO Suite Advanced Settings screen (Fig. 340. on page 518) click on button
SerialFInterface Driver Installation
This function performs the installation for the Alcatel Lower Layers Manager together with the
drivers needed for the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers. A splash screen will
appear as soon as the button applet is clicked (Fig. 341. below) and the installation begins.
User is asked to select installation and application language (Fig. 342. below).
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
519 / 592
Then the installation is carried out automatically after a simple confirmation by the user
(Fig. 343. below).
Select Configure Lower Layer and press FINISH button to open next screen (following
Fig. 344. )
520 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
3)
In screen of Fig. 344. above, complete the configuration and press OK button.
N.B.
6)
If a network adapter is not running in the PC, you can set the System identifierfield
with a sequence of 12 0. The following window will be displayed.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
521 / 592
At first SWP installation on ECT, after the installation of Alcatel Lower Layer Manager (carried out in
previous para.53.2 on page 519), it is necessary, for NE connection using TCP/IP through serial port, to
configure a Virtual Network Card.
Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is a software component used by Alcatel Lower Layers
Manager to manage TCP/IP packets through the serial port.
Follow this guide to install and configure Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers using the
Control Panel.
53.3.1 Important warning
Whenever, after the completion of this step, you must install a new network card, always verify
that the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is always the first
one in the Network Connections list. Refer to para.53.3.6 on page 546 for details.
refer to paragraph
on page
53.3.3
523
53.3.4
529
53.3.5
537
522 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
53.3 Installation and configuration of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower
Layers
Click the Add... button in the Adapter tab of the Network Control Panel applet.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
523 / 592
In the Insert Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation phase
(e.g. C:\WinNT\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC; type echo %systemroot% from a Command Prompt
window to discover the right location of the WinNT folder) and click OK.
If the dialog box in Fig. 347. appears, the driver is already installed.
524 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
53.3.3.2 Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers (Windows NT 4.0)
To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers use both the Bindings and the Protocols
tabs in the Network Control Panel applet.
Before configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP protocol
(please refer to Windows NT Help).
This operation must be performs at Administrator of the PC, because it subsequently could be to
set IP address .
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network Control Panel applet from
the Control Panel.
Select the bindings of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers in the Bindings tab (1), (2) of
the Network Control Panel applet.
Selecting the Protocols tab (5) of the Network Control Panel applet, the either a message box
(Fig. 349. NT configuration step 2) or a dialog box (Fig. 350. NT configuration step 3) may appear.
Follow the instructions until the dialog box (Fig. 351. NT configuration step 4) will appear.
2
3
4
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
525 / 592
Select Protocols tab (1), TCP/IP Protocol (2) and click the Properties button (3).
526 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
Configure the IP Address and the Subnet Mask for the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower
Layers and push OK.
3
4
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
527 / 592
Click Close in the Protocols tab of the Network Control Panel applet.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
The new configuration of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers will be used at the next restart
of the computer.
If you are configuring or installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you can click Yes.
If you are installing some other component you should click No and restart the computer later.
528 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
Click the Next button in the Welcome to the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard dialog box.
529 / 592
530 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
Click the Have Disk... button in the Select Network Adapter dialog box.
In the Install From Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation
phase (e.g. C:\WinNT\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC; type echo %systemroot% from a Command
Prompt window to discover the right location of the WinNT folder) and click OK.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
531 / 592
532 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
53.3.4.2 Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers (Windows 2000)
This operation must be performs at Administrator of the PC, because it subsequently could be to
set IP address .
To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network and Dialup connections
applet from the Control Panel.
Before installing and configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP
protocol (please refer to Windows 2000 Help).
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard from
the Control Panel.
Open the network connection using the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers from the
Network and Dialup connections applet.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
533 / 592
Uncheck any unneeded component in the Properties dialog box General tab (1). Check and select
the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) component (2) and click Properties (3).
1
2
534 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
Configure the IP Address (1) and the Subnet Mask (2) and push Advanced (3) to open the relevant
Advanced TC/IP Settings screen
In the Advanced TC/IP Settings screens Interface Metric field, write 50 (4) and push OK (5)
1
2
3
6
5
Fig. 361. Windows 2000 configuration step 3
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
535 / 592
536 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now configured. You need Alcatel Lower Layers Manager
to use it.
53.3.5.1 Installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers (Windows XP
Professional Edition)
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add Hardware Wizard from the Control
Panel.
After installing Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to configure it following the
instruction of the Windows XP: Configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers section.
Please make sure of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is not already installed on your PC:
Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers has to be installed only once.
Click the Next button in the Welcome to the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard dialog box.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
537 / 592
538 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
539 / 592
Click the Have Disk... button in the Select Network Adapter dialog box.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
In the Install From Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation
phase (e.g. C:\Windows\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC; type echo %systemroot% from a
Command Prompt window to discover the right location of the Windows folder) and click OK.
C:\Windows\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC
540 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
Click Next in the The wizard is ready to install your hardware dialog box.
541 / 592
This operation must be performed by the Administrator of the PC, because it subsequently
could be to set IP address .
To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network connections applet from
the Control Panel.
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard from
the Control Panel.
Open the network connection using the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers from the
Network and Dialup connections applet.
542 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
53.3.5.2 Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers (Windows XP
Professional Edition)
Uncheck any unneeded component (disable always the QoS Packet Scheduler 1 ) in the
Properties dialog box General tab. Check and select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) component (2)
and click Properties (3).
1
2
3
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
543 / 592
Configure the IP Address (1) and the Subnet Mask (2) and Advanced option (3) and then push OK
(4).
1
2
3
4
544 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
Configure the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog box select the WINS sheet (1), Disable NetBIOS
over TCP/IP (2) and then push OK (3).
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
545 / 592
For the SWP to operate correctly, it is necessary that the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers
is always the first one in the Network Connections list.
To carry out this check, operate as follows:
1)
2)
in the field LAN or High Speed Internet, select the Device Name Alcatel Virtual Network
Card for Lower Layers
3)
4)
in the relevant screen (Fig. 371. below) verify that it is the first in the list. If necessary, move its
position, using suitable arrows.
546 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
when unused, the ethernet physical interface is turned off and all associated communication
alarms are not reported; the associated LEDs are both off.
when used, the ethernet physical interface must be configured and, depending on this
information, the correct management is applied.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
547 / 592
The total radio capacity allocated for global Ethernet traffic is shared between all enabled Ethernet
ports. The modality of division of the bandwidth among the ports Ethernet enabled is defined from
the mechanism of QoS configured (see point [8] on page 551 ).
When the traffic data bandwidth requested is bigger than available radio capacity two actions are
possible:
if the flow control is enabled, the pause packet is sent to the port that create the congestion in
order to do not loss packets.
Note: it is only applicable to the direction from line to radio transmission where there could be
the traffic congestion, but not to the direction from radio to line transmission.
if the flow control is disabled, the packets according to priority classes will be discarded when
the buffer is full.
The supported pause function is symmetric and asymmetric. The pause function (enable/disable)
is independent of the autonegotiation: in fact, the autonegotiation could be enabled or disabled, but,
in any case, the capability is always fullduplex.
[1]
Speed: 10 Mbit/s or/and 100 Mbit/s or/and 1000 Mbit/s (all combinations are possible)
548 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
The following items resume the features supported by ULS in terms of Gigabit Ethernet
Physical interface management:
the operator can plan one or a set of rates (10 and/or 100 and/or 1000 Mb/s), and allow
to autonegotiate them;
the directionality can be half or fullduplex (when the 10 and/or 100 Mb/s rates are chosen,
the directionality can be half or full duplex, when the 1000 Mb/s rate is chosen, the
directionality is always fullduplex);
when the autonegotiation process fails or when the autonegotiation parameters are
changed, the autonegotiation restart command has to be performed in order to have new
configured parameters effective.
[2]
the Ethernet Flow Control (EFC) can be enabled or disabled; when it is enabled, PAUSE
function can be symmetric and asymmetric (IEEE 802.3x); the supported asymmetric case
is related to allowed Pause at transmission side, no allowed Pause at receiver side;
in case of remote peer MAC layer without EFC feature, the overflow of the input queues
causes to discard any further received MAC frames: a correct frame received and
discarded because of an input queues overflow, is not counted as a received frame;
total transparency towards the IEEE 802.1Q (VLAN management is presently not
supported);
Ethernet corrupted frames (Tx and Rx side independently) can be discarded or forwarded
to the addressed destination, according to the related SNMP manager request.
MAC Switching
The switch is capable of evaluate the destination address of each frame received and to
transmit the individual frames to the correct egress port in according to information contained
in a database address resolution table and associated to destination address. If switch does
not know on which port to forward the frame (destination address is not present in address
resolution table), it sends the packet on all ports (flooding). The switch must perform half
transparent bridge functionality thats to filter the frames which destination is on the segment
(port) where it was received.
Always enabled by default, no ECT/NM management is necessary.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
549 / 592
MAC Learning
The entry in a database, the address resolution table is written learned the source address
from received unicast packets. The switch supports also static writing of the address resolution
table, these entries are created and updated via programming interface. Up to 4096 entries
(MAC address port mapping) can be stored in the database.
It is always enabled.
[3]
MAC Ageing
In current SWP version, only default values are defined (typical value is 300 seconds, it is an
indicative value, the real range is 300 600 seconds)
The aging process periodically removes dynamically learned addresses from the address
resolution table.
The address aging process is used to ensure that if a node is disconnected from the network
segment, or it become inactive, its entry is removed from address database. Aging makes room
for new active addresses.
[4]
[5]
Frame types
The switch is able to treat Ethernet frames of the following types: Ethernet v2, 802.3, 802.1Q.
No ECT/NM management is necessary.
[6]
550 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
[2]
[7]
[8]
QoS management (IEEE 802.1p, IPV4 ToS & DiffServ, Port based)
The Ethernet switch provides a Quality of Service mechanism to control all streams. The QoS
feature, referred to the four ports (line side) Gigabit Ethernet, provides up to four internal queues
per port (four user ports and one radio) to support four different traffic priorities. These priorities
can be programmed in such a way that highpriority traffic in the switch experiences less delay
than lowerpriority traffic under congested conditions.
For Ethernet flows in the switch, it is possible by CT/NMS (see Fig. 131. on page 231 , and
Fig. 248. on page 352 ) to choose how assign the priority to each packet according to the
information in:
a)
The packet is examined for the presence of a valid 802.1P userpriority tag. If the tag is
present the correspondent priority is assigned to the packet.
When 802.1p QoS mechanism is adopted the reference is the standard IEEE
802.1D2004 Annex G User priorities and traffic classes that defines 7 traffic types and
the corresponding user priority values.
Considering that the switch has four egress queues for each port, the mapping 802.1p
value to queue is the following:
Tab. 74. QoS based on IEEE std. 802.1p
802.1P priority
Queue
111,110
101,100
Queue 3
011,000
Queue 2
010,001
When an incoming packet is not 802.1p it is assigned to the lowest priority queue.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
551 / 592
DiffServ
When DiffServ QoS mechanism is adopted the classification uses the DS field of the IP
packet header.
Each packet is classified based on DSCP field in the IP header to determine the priority.
Considering that for the switch has four egress queues for each port the mapping DSCP
value (6 bits) to queue is the following:
Tab. 75. QoS based on DiffServ
DiffServ priority
Queue
Queue 3
Queue 2
When an incoming packet has not DiffServ valid value, it is assigned to the lowest priority
queue.
[9]
Link aggregation
In current SWP version, the default corresponds to disabled link aggregation.
The link aggregation (or trunking) feature allows bundling several physical ports together to
form a single logical channel. In this way provides a more resilient end to end connection, and
enables load balancing.
The switch supports:
automatic failover: if one of multiple ports aggregate in a logical link fails, traffic network
is dynamically redirected to remaining good ports in the link.
Mac based trunking: the load balancing traffic depends of the dynamics of MAC address
distribution
552 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
b)
local side
(ECT side)
remote side
(equipment side)
F Interface
Port COM
Telephone network
PC/ECT
Remote
Modem
Local
Modem
PCLAPTOP/ECT
with internal modem
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
553 / 592
b)
c)
2)
3)
2)
Processor equipped:
Operating system:
RAM equipped:
Internal Modem:
PENTIUM III
Microsoft Windows 2000 v. 5.00.2195 service pack 2
128 Mbytes
10 Gbytes
3COM 56K v.90 Mini PCI MODEM
Remote Modem
Sportster Flash
Sportster Flash
TD 32 AC
3Com 56K Faxmodem
TD 32 AC
TD 32 AC
Sportster Flash
3Com 56K Faxmodem
TD 32 AC
554 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
PC/ECT (DTE)
Cannon 9 pins female
DCD
DCD
TD
TD
RD
RD
DTR
RTS
DSR
CTS
RTS
DSR
CTS
20
DTR
GND
GND
F Interface (DCE)
TD 2
RD
RD
RTS
RTS
CTS
CTS
DSR
DSR
CTS
20
DTR
GND
GND
TD
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
555 / 592
Only for external modem: connect the local modem to the PC/ECT with the cable of Fig. 373. on
page 555.
2)
Only for external modem: Power and switch on the local modem.
3)
On the PC, activate program HyperTerminal and configure the PCModem serial line with the
following parameters:
* Bits per second: 38400
* Data Bits:
8
* Parity:
None
* Stop Bit:
1
* Flow control:
None
4)
Execute and store the modem setup, writing the following commands in the HyperTerminal
program window:
AT&F1<Return>
ATT<Return>
ATX3<Return>
AT&W0<Return>
5)
Now, setting has been completed. External Modem can be switched off and disconnected, if
necessary.
556 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
N.B.
For confirmation, the modem configuration can be checked writing the command
ATI4<Return> in the HyperTerminal program window.
Information displayed should be as follows:
ATI4
U.S. Robotics Sportster Flash 56000 Settings...
B0 E1 F1 L2 M1 Q0 V1 X3 Y0
BAUD=38400 PARITY=N WORDLEN=8
DIAL=TONE OFF LINE CID=0
&A3
&M4
&B1
&N0
S00=000
S07=060
S15=000
S25=005
S33=000
S41=004
&C1
&P0
&D2
&R2
S01=000
S08=002
S16=000
S27=001
S34=000
S42=000
&H1
&S0
S02=043
S09=006
S18=000
S28=008
S35=000
&I0
&T5
&K1
&U0
S03=013
S10=014
S19=000
S29=020
S36=014
&Y1
S04=010
S11=072
S21=010
S30=000
S38=000
S05=008
S12=050
S22=017
S31=128
S39=012
S06=004
S13=000
S23=019
S32=002
S40=000
LAST DIALED #:
REMOTE MODEM SETTING
To set the remote modem, proceed as follows:
a)
b)
execute and store the modem setup, writing in the HyperTerminal program window the same
commands described in step 4 ) for the local modem setting, and adding the following command:
ATS=1<Return>
c)
(Autoanswering setting)
now, setting has been completed. Modem can be switched off and disconnected, if necessary.
N.B.
S00=001
For confirmation, the modem configuration can be checked writing the command
ATI4<Return> in the HyperTerminal program window.
Information displayed should be equal to that displayed for the local modem, with only the
difference for field S00:
S01=000
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
S02=043
S03=013
S04=010
S05=008
S06=004
557 / 592
This modem requires an initial HW setup via dipswitches and a SW setting via serial port.
To set the modem, both local and remote, proceed as follows:
1)
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW3
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
SW2
SW1
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW5
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW4
Connect the local modem to the PC/ECT with the cable of Fig. 373. on page 555.
3)
4)
On the PC, activate program HyperTerminal and configure the PCModem serial line with the
following parameters:
* Bits per second: 38400
* Data Bits:
8
* Parity:
None
* Stop Bit:
1
* Flow control:
None
5)
Execute and store the modem setup, writing the following commands in the HyperTerminal
program window:
AT&F1<Return>
AT&K0<Return>
ATA<Return>
AT&W0<Return>
AT&Y0<Return>
6)
Now, setting has been completed. Modem can be switched off and disconnected, if necessary.
558 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
N.B.
For confirmation, the modem configuration can be checked writing the command
AT\S<Return> in the HyperTerminal program window.
Information displayed should be as follows:
AT\S
CMD DESCRIPTION / OPTION
COUNTRY...........IT
DTE BPS........38400
DTE PARITY.....8NONE
LINE SPEED......NONE
B
BELL MODE........OFF
E
CMD ECHO..........ON
F
LINE MODE.......AUTO
L
SPKR VOLUME......LOW
M
SPKR CONTROL....CALL
N
AUTO MODE.........ON
Q
QUIET............OFF
V
RESULT FORM.....LONG
W
EC MSG.............0
X
EXT RESULTS........4
Y
LONG SPACE DISC...NO
%C COMPRESSION.....BOTH
K EXT. SERVICES......0
CMD
&A
&B
&C
&D
&G
&K
&L
&Q
&R
&S
&T
&X
&Y
\A
\G
\K
\N
DESCRIPTION / OPTION
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
559 / 592
In order to activate the connection and operate the ECT in remote way, proceed as specified herebelow.
Refer to Fig. 372. on page 553 for the distinction between local and remote modems.
N.B.
Connect the remote modem to equipments F interface with the cable of Fig. 374. on page 555.
2)
Connect the remote modem to the telephone line (as far as Sportster Flash model is concerned,
the connector to be used is the nearest to that used for the connection with equipments F
interface and signed with the wall symbol).
3)
4)
5)
Connect the local modem to the PC/ECT (with the cable of Fig. 373. on page 555.) on the serial
port assigned for the connection with F interface (usually COM1).
6)
Connect the local modem to the telephone line (as far as Sportster Flash model is concerned,
the connector to be used is the nearest to that used for the connection with equipments F
interface).
7)
8)
On the PC, activate program HyperTerminal and configure the PCLocal Modem serial line with
the following parameters:
* Bits per second: 38400
* Data Bits:
8
* Parity:
None
* Stop Bit:
1
* Flow control:
None
9)
For PC laptop Dell Latitude only, type the following command inside HyperTerminal program:
AT&C0&D0&R1
N.B.
this command must be typed every time the Hyper terminal session is opened (this
command is not stored in the modem NV RAM).
10 ) Execute the telephone call from the PC writing the following command in the HyperTerminal
program window:
ATDnnn<Return>
where nnn is the telephone network number associated to the remote telephone line (that
which the remote modem is connected to).
11 ) Wait the message indicating the successful connection between local and remote modems.
N.B.
(Sportster Flash)
(TD 32 AC)
560 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
at equipment side, the configuration must be setup as explained in the para.55.7.2 below,
at PC side, the configuration must be setup as explained in the following para.55.7.3 on page 562,
Login the NE through the TCO Suite Alarms & Settings function (see para.22.3.1 on page
156) using a login profile allowing the Modem Speed change (see Tab. 55. on page 158),
2)
enter the Modem Speed screen and set the required speed (see para.22.3.9 on page 167).
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
561 / 592
To configure the modem with the relevant speed, enter the menu Settings > Control Panel of the
Operating System and open the Alcatel Lower Layers utility. The menu of Fig. 376. opens.
562 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
Description
1AD035000002
1AD035000003
870952129
870952131
870952417
870952706
CHIAVE X ESAG.INCASSATO 6
870959166
CACCIAVITE 5,5X200
879010249
879010250
TOOL KEY 7 MM
8BE815010002
8BE815010070
TORQUE WRENCH
8BE815010080
ALLEN WRENCH
8BE815020020
3XIOO SCREWDRIVER
8BE815020021
3.5X100 SCREWDRIVER
8BE815020040
8BE815020041
8BE815020042
8BE815030000
TOOL KIT
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
563 / 592
P/N
Description
41172010
41172011
41911001
CORDONE X APPLICAZIONI A
248501099
870952129
870952131
870952417
870952706
CHIAVE X ESAG.INCASSATO 6
870959166
CACCIAVITE 5,5X200
879010249
879010250
TOOL KEY 7 MM
1AD024120002
UNHOOK TOOL
1AD035000002
1AD035000003
3AL79115AAAA
EXTRACTOR
3DB00489AAAA
COASSIAL CABLE
3DB01229AAAA
CABLE
3DB01400AAAA
3DB02519AAAA
CORD
3DB03884AAAA
LEVER
3DB05021AAAA
CORD
3DB06439AAAA
COAXIAL CORD
8BE815010002
8BE815010070
TORQUE WRENCH
8BE815010080
ALLEN WRENCH
8BE815020020
3XIOO SCREWDRIVER
8BE815020021
3.5X100 SCREWDRIVER
8BE815020040
8BE815020041
8BE815020042
8BE815030000
TOOL KIT
8BE815030001
TOOL KIT
564 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
Description
41172010
41172011
41911001
CORDONE X APPLICAZIONI A
248501099
870952129
870952131
870952417
870952706
CHIAVE X ESAG.INCASSATO 6
870959166
CACCIAVITE 5,5X200
879010249
879010250
TOOL KEY 7 MM
1AB026470031
PROTECTION*BIPOLAR
1AB026470031
PROTECTION*BIPOLAR
1AD024120002
UNHOOK TOOL
1AD035000002
1AD035000003
3AL79115AAAA
EXTRACTOR
3DB01229AAAA
CABLE
3DB03884AAAA
LEVER
8BE815010002
8BE815010070
TORQUE WRENCH
8BE815010080
ALLEN WRENCH
8BE815020020
3XIOO SCREWDRIVER
8BE815020021
3.5X100 SCREWDRIVER
8BE815020040
8BE815020041
8BE815020042
8BE815030000
TOOL KIT
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
565 / 592
566 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
on page 569
on page 572
herebelow
on page 568
Productrelease applicability
The current edition of this Manual applies to the 9400AWY Rel.2.1 in the RF band configurations
listed in Tab. 46. on page 127.
b)
NE applicability
The current edition of this Manual applies to the following Network Elements (NE): ULS
c)
N.B.
SWP Version
(N.B.)
V2.1.1
For the meaning of SWP Release and Version, please refer to para.57.3.2 on page 573.
The indication of the Versions in this Manual has the following meaning:
this Manual applies starting from the Versions stated in this table, but it could also apply to
subsequent Versions for the following reasons:
a)
this Manual is not modified, unless the new version distributed to the Customers
comprises changes to the manmachine interface, or even in the presence of minor
changes that do not affect negatively the understandability of the procedures described
therein (e.g. a button moved internally to a screen);
b)
furthermore, if the screens contained in this Manual show the versionrelease of the
productrelease, then they are not replaced in the subsequent versions of Manual if their
contents remains unchanged.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
567 / 592
This Manual belongs to the Customer Documentation set envisaged for the equipment specified in
para.57.1.1 on page 567.
Refer to para.57.2 on page 569 in order to have the list and description of the Customer Documentation
set.
Taking into account that the system consists of an InDoor Unit (IDU), an OutDoor Unit (ODU), and a
Software Package (SWP), this Manual provides the following information:
system description at different detail levels, with regard to system, hardware and software
IDU and ODU item Part Numbers and equipping rules (provisioning)
unit operative hardware description: access point description (usage of LED, pushbuttons, switches
and connectors for Customer use), connection rules, hardware setting options
operation and maintenance activities the operators can carry out according to the specific software
application(s) referred to in this Manual [see para. 57.1.1 point c ) on page 567 ].
SWP installation
is not strictly necessary before starting this document, but its knowledge is necessary for operating the
procedures introduced by this document and detailed in the other sections of this Manual.
568 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
this Documentation set is relevant to 9400AWY Rel.2.1 final version V2.1.1 only.
The Documentation set relevant to 9400AWY Rel.2.1 previous version V2.1.0 and
prerelease version V2.1.1* is contained in the CDROM P/N 3DB16142ABAA.
Technical Description
DCP 9400AWY 2.1 V2.1.1 CD_ROM
[A]
Technical Code
3DB 16142 ACAA
This CDROM contains, in electronic format (ADOBE ACROBAT pdf files), all handbooks
listed in Tab. 77. on page 570
N.B.
a)
Standard supply
One copy of the 9400AWY Rel.2.1.1 CDROM is automatically delivered to Customer together with
the equipment it refers to (one copy for each terminal).
As 9400AWY Rel.2.1.1 CDROM is a standard commercial item, additional copies can be ordered
and delivered as any other AlcatelLucent commercial item.
Supply to Customers of paper copies of the handbooks is not envisaged.
Supply to Customers of Customer Documentation source files is not envisaged.
b)
Productdocumentation consistency
Equipment description and layout are always general, i.e. they never describe the actual
composition of the equipment supplied to Customer (this task is entrusted to plantdependent
documentation).
Detailed hardware documentation concerns actually supplied units and is coherent with the
production issue of such units.
Softwareassociated handbooks are coherent with the supplied SWP release.
Copies of the CDROMs regarding a specific productrelease previously delivered can be required
specifying P/N and edition.
c)
Copyright notification
The technical information of the handbooks and CDROMs supplied to Customers is the property
of AlcatelLucent and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written
consent.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
569 / 592
N.B.
The P/Ns of handbooks is just for Alcatel internal management only. As specified in point a )
on page 569, they do not represent Commercial item P/Ns.
REF
HANDBOOKT NAME
HANDBOOK P/N
[B]
USER MANUAL (n.b.2)
[C]
ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION
[E]
n.b.1
the Installation Handbook provides detailed descriptions and instructions, and is mainly
addressed to technicians who have never installed a 9400AWY system before
the Installation Guide provides same information in a more concise way, and is mainly
addressed to technicians who have already installed a 9400AWY system
This User Manual makes reference to the Installation Handbook; using it or the Installation
Guide is on Customer choice.
n.b.2
n.b.3
Contains the Test Report Sheets and the Site Acceptance Test protocol, according to
AlcatelLucent WTD LAB. rules. The source file of this document (MSWord 2000) is also
distributed in the Documentation CDROM.
n.b.4
Describes the measurement procedure for the interference searching in the various RF bands
used by Alcatel Radio Transmission products. It is common to all Alcatel Radio Transmission
products.
570 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
CTK
Version
(N.B.)
q 3.0.1
[F]
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT (Craft
terminal) of AlcatelLucent InfoModel Network Elements.
q 3.0.1
[H]
P/N
[G]
ITEM
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm Surveillance
software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
q 3.0.1
[I]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log Browser
software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
N.B.
The CT Version is displayed when, on the PC, you select the 1320CT application for its
launch.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
571 / 592
This paragraph describes in general the AlcatelLucent Customer Documentation system, details the
association between the product levels and the associated documentation, and explains Customer
Documentation characteristics as well as the policies for its delivery and updating.
This paragraph is fully applicable to the 2nd generation Radio Product families of AlcatelLucent WTD
(Wireless Transmission Division) only.
57.3.1 CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation
a)
Definition
Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as
plantindependent and is always independent of any Customization.
Plantdependent and/or Customized documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to
commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned
N.B.
b)
the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation
of the manmachine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it;
N.B.
572 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
Products
A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of
performances and services that it is meant for.
E.g. 9400AWY is a product.
b)
Product-releases
A product evolves through successive productreleases, which are the real products marketed
for their delivery at a certain productrelease availability date. A certain productrelease performs
more functionalities than the previous one.
E.g. Rel.1.0, Rel.2.0 and Rel.2.1 are three successive productreleases of the same product.
A productrelease comprehends a set of hardware components and at least one Software
Package (SWP); as a whole, they identify the possible network applications and the equipment
performances that the specific productrelease has been designed, engineered, and marketed for.
c)
d)
A 9400AWY SWP is identified by its Denomination, Part Number and Change Status, that
are printed on the CDROMs label.
The SWP Denomination versions first and second digits (e.g. 2.1) correspond to the HW
productrelease number first and second digits; third digit of the SWP version identifies the
Version Level of the SWP.
A 9400AWY SWP with new Denomination and Part Number represents a fully new SWP
having main features in addition to those of the previous SWP.
A 9400AWY SWP with same Denomination and Part Number , but with new Change
Status corresponds to a new version of such SWP, usually developed for bugfixing purposes
and/or minor additional features.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
573 / 592
Customer Documentation
A productrelease(configuration) has its own set of standard Customer Documentation, usually
formed of several handbooks, i.e., in general:
an Installation Handbook
Software documentation:
evolution
PRODUCTRELEASE 1.0
PRODUCTRELEASE 2.1
ALTERNATIVE CONFIGURATIONS
CONFIG.A
SWP REL.1.0
PRODUCT
LEVELS
CONFIG.B
evolution
SWP REL.1.1
DOCUMENTATION
CONFIG.A
System & HW
Documentation
SWP REL.1.0
SW
Documentation
SWP REL.1.1
SW
Documentation
574 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
e)
SYMBOL
or vertical
H
)
)
MEANING
STARTING WITH NUMBERS
9400AWY
9400FSO
9600FSO
9600LSY
9600USY
ABIL
Enabling
ABN
Abnormal
AC
Alternate Current
ACD
ACSE
ADC A/D
AE
Access Enable
AF
Atomic Function
ADM
AGC
AIS
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
575 / 592
ALS
AMI
AND
ANSI
AP
Alternate Polarization
API
APS
APT
AS
Alarm Surveillance
ASAP
ASE
ASIC
AT
Attended Alarm
ATL
ATM
ATPC
ATTD
AUX
AUXiliary
AVC
MEANING
B
BATT
Battery
BB
Base Band
BBE
BCA
BER
BIP
BKPV
BNC
BSC
BTS
CAND
CCDP
CCITT
CD
Current Data
CE
European Conformity
CFA
C/I
CK
Clock
CLA
CLEC
576 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
MEANING
CMISE
CMISS
Card Missing
CO
Central Office
COAX
Coaxial
CP
Copolar
CPE
CPI
CPO
CPU
CRCn
CS
CT
Craft Terminal
CTP
DA
Distant Alarm
DAV
D/A
DC
Direct Current
DCC
DCE
DCN
DDF
DEFEC
FEC Decoder
DEM
Demodulator
DEMUX
Demodulator
DF
Dialog Failure
DIV
Diversity
DM
Degraded Minute
DRRS
DTE
DTI
DTMF
EB
Errored Block
EBC
EBU
EC
Equipment Controller
ECC
ECS
ECT
EE
Equipment Engineering
EF
Equipment Failure
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
577 / 592
EIA
EIRP
ELB
EMC
ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
EMI
Electromagnetic interference
EML
EOW
EPS
ES
Errored Second
ESD
Electrostatic discharges
ETH
ETHernet
ETR
ETS
ETSI
EW
Early Warning
EWH
EWL
EXCBER
Excessive BER
MEANING
F
F
FAD
FCC
FCS
FD
Frequency Diversity
FE
FEC
FIT
Failure Unit
FPGA
FR
FSO
FTP
GA
GND
Ground
GNE
Horizontal (polarization)
HBER
HCS
HD
History Data
HDBK
Handbook
578 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
MEANING
HDB3
HDLC
HET
HETerofrequency
HEW
HK
HouseKeeping
HSB or HST
Hot Standby
HMI
HS
HW
Hardware
HWP
Hardware Protection
IJ
ICS
ID
IDentifier
IDU
InDoor Unit
IEC
IEEE
IF
Intermediate Frequency
IM
IN
Input
IND
Indicative alarm
INT
I/O
Input/Output
IP
Internet Protocol
IRC
ISO
ITUR (*)
ITUT (*)
JRE
LAC
LAN
LAPD
LBER
LC
Loss of Configuration
LCS
LDI
LED
LEW
LIM
LLMAN
LO
Local Oscillator
LOF
Loss Of Frame
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
579 / 592
Loss Of Multiframe
LOS
Loss Of Signal
LS
Low Speed
MEANING
M
MAC
MAJ
Major (alarm)
MAU
MCF
MDT
MEM
Memorization
MIB
MIN
Minor (alarm)
MLR
MOC
MOD
Modulator
MSOH
MSp
MSw
MTBF
MTTR
MUX
Multiplexer
N
NBF
NDS
NA
Not Applicable
NE
Network Element
NES
NEBC
NF
Noise Figure
NFD
NG
Not Urgent
NML
NMS
NRZ
NSA
NTP
NURG
OBPS
OC_R
ODU Controller_Radio
OCT
ODF
580 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
MEANING
ODU
OutDoor Unit
ODUC
ODU Controller
OFS
OH
OverHead
O&M
OIRT
OOF
Out Of Frame
OOS
Out Of Service
OR
ORALIM
OS
Operation System
OSI
OSPF
OUT
Output
OVF
Overflow
OW
Order Wire
P
PABX
PBX
PC
Personal Computer
PDH
PFAIL
PI
Physical Interface
PLL
PLM
PayLoad Mismatch
PM
Performance Monitoring
PPI
ppm
PPP
PRx
Received power
PRBS
P/S
Parallel/Serial converter
PS
Power Supply
PSA
PSA C
PSA D
PSK
PSR
PSU
PTx
Transmitted power
Q
QAM
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
581 / 592
QOS
MEANING
Quality Of Service
R
RAI
RAM
RAPS
RC
Radio Controller
RCK
Received clock
RCIM
RDI
RECC
Recommendation
RECT
REI
REF
Reference
REL
Release
RF
Radio Frequency
RFC
RI
Remote Inventory
RL
Received Level
RLTS
RMS
RNURG
Not urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red LED
RPI
RPS
RSOH
RSPI
RT
Transceiver
RTF
RTPC
RURG
Rx
Receiver/Received
S
SA
SC
SD
Space Diversity
SDH
SES
SF
Signal Fail
SNMP
SP
Splitter
SQ
Squelch
S/P
Serial to Parallel
SSF
582 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
MEANING
STBY
Standby
SU
Supervisory Unit
SW
Switch or Software
SWP
Software Package
T
TA
Remote Alarm
TCO
TCP
TD
Layout drawing
TDM
TEM
TIM
TL
Transmitted Level
TLTS
TM
TMN
TN
Telecommunications Network
TPH
Telephone
TP
Termination Point
TPS
Tx Protection Switching
TR
TRCF
TRCO
TRIB
Tributary
TRSEF
TS
Time Slot
TRU
TTF
TTO
TTP
Tx
Transmitter/Transmitted
U
Unavailability
UAS
UnAvailable Second
UAT
UnAvailable Time
UDR
UG
Urgent Alarm
UMTS
URG
Urgent
URU
USC
USM
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
583 / 592
UT
Unavailability Time
UTRAN
MEANING
V
V
Vertical (polarization)
VCO
VF
Voice Frequency
VLAN
VSWR
WAN
WBF
WIP
Wireless IP
WLT
WS
Work Station
X
XPD
XPIC
XPI
XPIF
XPOL
Cross Polar/Polarization
NOTES:
(*)
Owing to change of name, all documents issued by the two ITU committees (CCIR ND
CCITT) in 1992 (and in some cases even before then) are classified as ITUR and ITUT,
respectively.
584 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
585 / 592
586 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
587 / 592
588 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents not
permitted without written authorization from AlcatelLucent
copying the example form, filling it and sending it to your Local Alcatel Technical Assistance
Center. In this case handbook data are already available at the page bottom.
using the same form (if available) as a file in the relevant documentation CDROM, saving,
filling and sending it by email to your Local Alcatel Technical Assistance Center.
creating a dedicated form on paper or file and sending it to your Local Alcatel Technical
Assistance Center.
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
589 / 592
Handbook data
Product release, version: 9400AWY Rel.2.1 SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
Handbook type: USER MANUAL
Handbook part number and edition: 3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
General evaluation
SUBJECT
5 (max.)
1 (min.)
1 (min.)
Total evaluation
Info quantity
Info quality
Info structure
Consulting facility
Layout
Section evaluation
SECTION
5 (max.)
Front matter
1 : System description
2 : NE management BY TCO Suite and CT
3 : Installation and commissioning
4 : Maintenance and upgrade
5 : Appendices
Your comments (strictly necessary when value is less than 3)
Suggestion for improvements
Which subject to deepen:
How to deepen:
Other comments/suggestions:
Error identified
Reader Info
Name:
Date;
Company:
Job:
Address:
Email:
Phone:
Fax:
590 / 592
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
USER MANUAL
APPENDICES
591 / 592
www.alcatellucent.com
fase
step
TARGHETTE - LABELS
Fig. 1. pg. 594
10
11
12
SECTION 5: APPENDICES
USER MANUAL
Handbook print & assembly
numerate
numbered
No pagine
(facciate)
No pages
da from
a to
1/592
28/592
29/592
138/592
139/592
306/592
307/592
406/592
407/592
498/592
499/592
592/592
593 / 592
9400AWY Rel.2.1
7813151823252838 GHz
shorthaul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links
USER MANUAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
VOL.1/1
9400AWY Rel.2.1
7813151823252838 GHz
shorthaul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links
SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
USER MANUAL
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
VOL.1/1
9400AWY Rel.2.1
7813151823252838 GHz shorthaul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links
USER MANUAL
VOL.1/1
9400AWY Rel.2.1
7813151823252838 GHz shorthaul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links
VOL.1/1
9400AWY Rel.2.1
7813151823252838 GHz
shorthaul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links
SWP 9400AWY R.2.1 V2.1.1
3DB 16142 EAAA Ed.02
USER MANUAL
VOL.1/1
Fig. 1.
594 / 592
USER MANUAL
Handbook print & assembly
Note for Customers: this part contains editorial information for Alcatellucent internal use only,
and should have not be given to you. Nevertheless, in case you receive it, take into account that
it does not contain information useful for you, so that you can simply ignore it.
Printable file without revision bars: used for official distribution to Customers (and inserted
in CDROM without this part)
PDF file must be opened with ACROBAT Reader Version 5.0 at least.
(N.B. : it has been created with ACROBAT DISTILLER 7.0)
SIZE Mbytes
TOTAL N.PAGES
PDM ARCHIVE
METHOD
QUICKSILVER 1.5.3
633
600
IDU WINZIP
WARNING: the source file folder contains also the pdf file with revision bars
Notes on revision bars: revision bars point out changes with respect to the previous edition
archived in PDM
N.B.
page numbers specified in table on page 593 are automatic and obtained by
autoreference to tags of:
N.B.
USER MANUAL
Handbook editorial information
595 / 592
2 HANDBOOK HISTORY
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
(yymmdd)
(ECO)
01
070802
02
080125
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
E.Corradini
E.Corradini
00000 57267
m = modified part
01
02
QUICK GUIDE
11
12
System overview
13
14
15
Technical specifications
22
23
Configuration
24
Equipment
25
Line Interface
26
Radio
27
External points
28
Supervision
29
Protection schemes
210 Loopbacks
211
Diagnosis
596 / 592
03
04
05
USER MANUAL
Handbook editorial information
01
02
03
04
05
31
32
Maintenance Policy
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
SECTION 5: APPENDICES
m
m
Documentation guide
n
m
USER MANUAL
Handbook editorial information
597 / 592
Draft editions neither validated nor officially released issue, for AlcatelLucent internal purposes:
1)
2)
other changes for GUI modifications from prerelease V2.1.1* to final V2.1.1 on
pages: 156 to 158 , 166 , 203 , 231 and 232 , 351 and 352 , 363
changes for RF Loopback on pages 46 , 268 , 269 , 385 ; 386 (removed test and
report regarding RF loopback, done also in TRS document ED.03)
improved description of ECT & NE upgrade from V2.1.0 to V2.1.1 from page 495
(and associated WARNINGs on pages 486 and 493 )
598 / 592
USER MANUAL
Handbook editorial information
submitted by P.Garofoli:
Fig. 41. , Fig. 42. , Fig. 43. and Fig. 44. on pages 114 to 117
submitted by B.Magnan:
new WARNING in para.23.4 on page 210 ; one line deleted on page 230
USER MANUAL
Handbook editorial information
599 / 592
b)
on page 88 : removed this mode includes DCE behavior from CODIR description
eliminated the RF loopback detailed scheme, that was present on page following 268
on page 349 : and two Ethernet port configuration screens replaced by and
four Ethernet port configuration screens
in Tab. 23. on page 93 : eliminated Software Key P/Ns. Moreover, throughout the
handbook: Software Key replaced by Software Label
additional corrections for harmonization with AWY 2.0.6 User Manual ED.01:
The handbook officially distributed to Customers (as pdf file inside the specific Customer
Documentation CDROM) contains neither revision bars nor this part (handbook editorial
information). Source and pdf files of final ED.02 with revision bars are archived in PDM as
specified in chapter 1 on page 595
600 / 592
USER MANUAL
Handbook editorial information